2008 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M · this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For...

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-8Safety Belts .............................................. 1-9Child Restraints ....................................... 1-29Airbag System ......................................... 1-54Restraint System Check ............................ 1-68

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-3Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-11Windows ................................................. 2-17Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-20Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-24Mirrors .................................................... 2-38Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-41OnStar® System ...................................... 2-43Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-47Storage Areas ......................................... 2-52Sunroof .................................................. 2-54

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-30Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-49Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-84

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-27

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-56Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-58Windshield Replacement ........................... 5-62Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-62Tires ...................................................... 5-63Appearance Care ..................................... 5-99Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-107Electrical System .................................... 5-108Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-116

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-15Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-17

Index ................................................................ 1

2008 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, BUICK,the BUICK Emblem, and the name LACROSSE areregistered trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the timeit was printed. We reserve the right to make changes afterthat time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Buick Motor Division whenever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features that may be available inthis model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.For example, more than one entertainment system maybe offered or your vehicle may have been orderedwithout a front passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Propriétaires CanadiensOn peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en françaisauprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:

Helm IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123www.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864654 A First Printing ©2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

Using this ManualMany people read the owner manual from beginning toend when they first receive their new vehicle to learnabout the vehicle’s features and controls. Picturesand words work together to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information about thevehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It isan alphabetical list of what is in the manual andthe page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in this book.A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell aboutthings that could hurt you or others if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to helpavoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do Not do this”or “Do Not let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsYou will also find notices in this manual.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle. Many times, this damage would not be coveredby your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTIONand NOTICE warnings in different colors or in differentwords.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

iv

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Power Seats ..................................................1-2Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-3Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4Head Restraints .............................................1-6Center Seat ...................................................1-7

Rear Seats .......................................................1-8Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-8

Safety Belts .....................................................1-9Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-22Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-27Lap Belt ......................................................1-28Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-29

Child Restraints .............................................1-29Older Children ..............................................1-29Infants and Young Children ............................1-33Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-39

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) ......................................1-41

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat Position ....................................1-47

Securing a Child Restraint in the CenterFront Seat Position ....................................1-50

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position ....................................1-50

Airbag System ...............................................1-54Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-57When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-59What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-60How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-60What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-60Passenger Sensing System ............................1-62Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-66Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-67Restraint System Check ..................................1-68

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-68Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ...................................................1-69

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Power Seats

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used tooperate them are located on the outboard side of theseats. To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion bymoving the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion bymoving the rear of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entirecontrol up or down.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-2

Power Lumbar

On seats with power lumbar, the control is located onthe outboard side of the seat cushion.

Press the front of the control to increase lumbar support.Press the rear of the control to decrease lumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Heated Seats

On vehicles with thisfeature, the buttons arelocated on the climatecontrol panel.

Press the button once to activate the high heat setting.Both indicator lights on the button will come on. Press thebutton again to select the lower temperature setting. Onlyone indicator light will come on. Press the button a thirdtime to turn the heat off.

This feature only works when the ignition is on.

1-3

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you do not want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatback to be sure itis locked.

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The leverused to operate them is located on the outboard side ofthe seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:1. Lift the recline lever.2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then

release the lever to lock the seatback in place.3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is

locked.

1-4

To return the seatback to an upright position, do thefollowing:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to theseatback and the seatback will return to the uprightposition.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts cannot do theirjob when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job because itwill not be against your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash,the belt could go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

1-5

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint isat the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in acrash.

Pull the head restraint upto raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button, locatedon the top of the seatback, and push the headrestraint down.

1-6

Center Seat Your vehicle may have a front center seat. There arecupholders on the underside of the seat cushion. To usethem, raise the seat cushion. This seat can also beconverted to a storage area by lowering the armrest.See Center Console Storage on page 2-53.

1-7

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatIf your vehicle has this feature, both sides of the rearseatback can be folded down. This gives direct accessto the trunk. Make sure the front seats are not reclined.If they are, the rear seatback(s) may not fold down allthe way.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat orthe safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety beltsand return them to their normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To lower the rear seatback,pull the tab located onthe outboard side ofthe seatback and foldthe seatback forward.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback up until itlatches. Push and pull on the seatback to be sureit is locked in position.

The seatbacks should be kept in the upright, lockedposition when they are not being used to extendthe cargo area.

1-8

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannotwear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you are not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle harder or be ejectedfrom it and be seriously injured or killed. Inthe same crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safety belts.Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle yoursafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32.In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are in between. In many ofthem, people who buckle up can survive and sometimeswalk away. Without belts they could have been badlyhurt or killed.After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

1-9

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seaton wheels.

Put someone on it.

1-10

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-11

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-12

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if youare upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driverdoes not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number of seriousinjuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-13

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-29or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown outof the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike othersin the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and youwould be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.

1-14

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit snugly againstyour body.

1-15


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low and snug on thehips, just touching the thighs.

1-16


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not on the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-17


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goesover an armrest like this. The belt would bemuch too high. In a crash, you can slide underthe belt. The belt force would then be appliedon the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, andthat could cause serious or fatal injuries.Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

1-18


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

1-19


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, youwould not be restrained by the shoulder belt.Your body could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head and neck injury.You might also slide under the lap belt. Thebelt force would then be applied right on theabdomen. That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.

1-20


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you would not have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.

1-21

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulderexcept for the center front passenger position, if yourvehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt onpage 1-28 for more information.

Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passengerbelt out all the way, you may engage the childrestraint locking feature. If this happens, just letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.If you find that the latch plate will not go fully intothe buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 1-29.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if necessary.

1-22

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,move it to the height that is right for you. Impropershoulder belt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later inthis section.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way. When the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety beltwebbing. The latch plate should rest on the stitching onthe safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out ofthe way. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

1-23

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterYour vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for thedriver and right front passenger position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt iscentered on your shoulder. The belt should be away fromyour face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pressdown on the releaselever (A) and move theheight adjuster to thedesired position. You canmove the height adjusterup just by pressing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try tomove it down without squeezing the release lever tomake sure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for frontoutboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can helptighten the safety belts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, and probably othernew parts for your safety belt system. See ReplacingRestraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-69.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the beltaway from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to install acomfort guide to the safety belt:

1-24

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the twoedges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

1-25

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly worn may notprovide the protection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could be seriouslyinjured. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts ofthe body are best able to take belt restrainingforces.

1-26

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt asdescribed previously in this section. Make surethat the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out ofthe guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn theguide and clip inward and slide them in betweenthe seatback and the interior body, leaving only theloop of the elastic cord exposed.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it ismore likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-27

Lap BeltThis part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear alap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.

You vehicle may have a center seating position.When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull italong the belt.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shownuntil the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extenderon page 1-29.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly ifnecessary.

If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into thebuckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be surethat the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle.

1-28

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For moreinformation, see the instruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

The manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the booster seat, state the weight andheight limitations for that booster.

1-29

Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try usingthe rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear SafetyBelt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 1-22 for more information. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on the shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for length oftrip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a positionwith a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restrainta shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It shouldnever be worn over the abdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” underLap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-22.

According to accident statistics, children and infantsare safer when properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-30

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt cannot properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

1-31

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. In a crash, the child wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild might slide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied right on theabdomen. That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The child could also move too farforward increasing the chance of head andneck injury. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-32

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and in everyCanadian province says children up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled ifa shoulder belt is wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues to tighten. Neverleave children unattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Children who are not restrained properly canstrike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.In addition, young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone; they need to use a child restraint.

1-33

{CAUTION:

People should never hold an infant in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. An infant doesnot weigh much — until a crash. During acrash an infant will become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it. For example, in a crash atonly 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infantwill suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. An infant should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

1-34

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

1-35

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasinga child restraint, be sure it is designed to beused in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint willhave a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. This isnecessary because a newborn infant’s neck isweak and its head weighs so much comparedwith the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant ina rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, sothe crash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants should always be secured inappropriate infant restraints.

1-36

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infantseat (A) provides restraintwith the seating surfaceagainst the back ofthe infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and,in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned inthe restraint.

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s bodywith the harness.

1-37

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions that camewith that restraint, and also the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCHsystem. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-41 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

1-38

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to thismanual. The child restraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when nochild is in it.

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in acrash if the child is not properly secured inthe child restraint. Because there are differentsystems, it is important to refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint. Makesure the child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with that restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children and child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding ina forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are large enough,using safety belts.

1-39

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing child restraints besecured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

CAUTION: (Continued)


If you secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62for additional information.

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center frontseat can be badly injured or killed by thefrontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure achild restraint in the center front seat. It isalways better to secure a child restraint in arear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition.

1-40

When securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even whenno child is in it.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint during drivingor in a crash. This system is designed to make installationof a child restraint easier. The LATCH system usesanchors in the vehicle and attachments on the childrestraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint isproperly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual. When installing a childrestraint with a top tether, you must also use either thelower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.The child restraint manufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the child restraint and itsattachments. The following explains how to attach achild restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints havelower anchors and attachments or top tether anchorsand attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seatingposition that will accommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

1-41

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraintto the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in orderto reduce the forward movement and rotation of the childrestraint during driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or adual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether being attached.Others require the top tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires that forward-facingchild restraints have a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructionsfor your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Askthe child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

1-42

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions with toptether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position with loweranchors has two labels,near the crease betweenthe seatback and theseat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors, thetop tether anchor symbolis located on the cover.

The top tether anchors are located under the coverson the rear seatback filler panel. Flip open the cover toaccess the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

Rear Seat

1-43

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without atop tether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-39 foradditional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached toanchors, the restraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, the child could beseriously injured or killed. Make sure that aLATCH-type child restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchor inthe vehicle is designed to hold only one childrestraint. Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor could cause the


1-44


anchor or attachment to come loose or evenbreak during a crash. A child or others couldbe injured if this happens. To help preventinjury to people and damage to your vehicle,attach only one child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangledif a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues to tighten.Secure any unused safety belts behind thechild restraint so children cannot reach them.Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has been installed.Be sure to follow the instructions of the childrestraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCHattachment parts and the vehicle’s safety beltassembly may cause damage to these parts. Makesure when securing unused safety belts behindthe child restraint that there is no contact betweenthe child restraint LATCH attachment parts andthe vehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safety beltssecured may cause damage to the safety belt orthe seat. When removing the child restraint, alwaysremember to return the safety belts to their normal,stowed position before folding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to thelower anchors. If the child restraint does not havelower attachments or the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether and the safety belts.Refer to your child restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on

the child restraint to the lower anchors.

1-45

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.Refer to the child restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Open the top tether anchor cover to expose

the anchor.2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraint instructionsand the following instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using adual tether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

1-46

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionWhen securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If yousecure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses atop tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 1-41 for top tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without atop tether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top strap must beanchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

1-47

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,you will be using the safety belt to secure the childrestraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.

If you need to install more than one child restraint in therear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restrainton page 1-39.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Make sure the release button is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif necessary.

1-48

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lapportion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. If you are using a forward-facingchild restraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.

1-49

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions regardingthe use of the top tether. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41for more information.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tetheris attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center frontseat can be badly injured or killed by thefrontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure achild restraint in the center front seat. It isalways better to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place tosecure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 1-39.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem which is designed to turn off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34for more information on this, including important safetyinformation.


1-50

{CAUTION:



If you secure a forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62for additional information.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 1-41 for how to install your child restraintusing LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using asafety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the topstrap must be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.When the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator on the passenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 3-34.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

1-51

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Make sure the release button is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif necessary.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-52

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lapportion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. If you are using a forward-facingchild restraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraint as youtighten the belt.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator will come on and stay on whenthe vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the childrestraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightlyrecline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seatcushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraintis not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

Remove any additional material from the seat such asblankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seatmassagers before reinstalling or securing the childrestraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle andcheck with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way.

1-53

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger

Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger andthe passenger seated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the wordAIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe middle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appearalong the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags mustinflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you are not wearing your safety belt — evenif you have airbags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Airbags are “supplementalrestraints” to the safety belts. All airbags aredesigned to work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

1-54

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.

Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe crashes where somethinghits the side of your vehicle. They are notdesigned to inflate in frontal, in rollover,or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,or very close to, any airbag when it inflatescan be seriously injured or killed. Do not situnnecessarily close to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edge of your seat orleaning forward. Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during a crash. Always wearyour safety belt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleep againstthe door or side windows in seating positionswith roof-rail airbags.

1-55

{CAUTION:

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer thebest protection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children and infantsneed the protection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Always secure childrenproperly in your vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 1-29 or Infants andYoung Children on page 1-33.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33for more information.

1-56

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.

1-57

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, rightfront passenger, and second row outboard passengers,they are in the ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the airbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into that personcausing severe injury or even death. The pathof an inflating airbag must be kept clear.Do not put anything between an occupant andan airbag, and do not attach or put anythingon the steering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie down through any dooror window opening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

1-58

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are usedto predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags

could inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a more severefrontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stageairbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 1-54. Roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system’s designed threshold level. The thresholdlevel can vary with specific vehicle design.Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A roof-rail airbag is intended to deploy on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbagshould have inflated simply because of the damage toa vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what thevehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly thevehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags, deploymentis determined by the location and severity of the sideimpact.

1-59

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sendsan electrical signal triggering a release of gas fromthe inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbagcausing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are allpart of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of thevehicle, near the side windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact theinside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distributethe force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’supper body.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-59 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,so quickly that some people may not even realize anairbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time after they deploy.Some components of the airbag module may be hotfor several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leavingthe vehicle.

1-60

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dustin the air. This dust could cause breathingproblems for people with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyonein the vehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbaginflates, then get fresh air by opening a windowor a door. If you experience breathing problemsfollowing an airbag deployment, you shouldseek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turnthe hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warning flashers off by usingthe controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additionalwindshield breakage may also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts for theairbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will include airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The service manual for yourvehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy onpage 7-17 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-18.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbagsystem will not work properly. See your dealer/retailer for service.

1-61

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system for theright front passenger’s position. The passenger airbagstatus indicator will be visible on the instrument panelwhen you start your vehicle.

The words ON and OFFwill be visible during thesystem check.

If you are using remote start to start your vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.

The passenger sensing system will turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.The driver’s airbags are not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensors thatare part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing childrestraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; anolder child riding in a booster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.


1-62

{CAUTION:



If you secure a forward-facing child restraintin the right front seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go.It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turn offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant is present ina rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child is presentin a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off ofthe seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who has outgrownchild restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turned off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.

If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicatoris lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following thechild restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer toSecuring a Child Restraint in the Right Front SeatPosition on page 1-50.

1-63

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure thatthe vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraintinto the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly reclinethe vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion ifpossible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-6.

Remove any additional material from the seat suchas blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, orseat massagers before reinstalling or securing the childrestraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed to enable(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbaganytime the system senses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. Whenthe passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag tobe enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remindyou that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown child restraintsand for very small adults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, depending upon the person’s seating postureand body build. Everyone in your vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag for thatperson.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting properly in the seat.If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove anyadditional material from the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagersand ask the person to place the seatback in the fullyupright position, then sit upright in the seat, centeredon the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortablyextended. Restart the vehicle and have the personremain in this position for two to three minutes.This will allow the system to detect that person andthen enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

1-64

Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing system maintain the passengerairbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” inthe Index for additional information about the importanceof proper restraint use.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrumentpanel cluster ever comes on and stays on,it means that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens, havethe vehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have the protectionof the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-33 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket orcushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates. We recommendthat you not use seat covers or other aftermarketequipment other than any that GM has approved foryour specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67 for moreinformation about modifications that can affect howthe system operates.

1-65

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid soaks into the seat.If this happens, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator and the airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will be lit. The system should resumenormal operation after the seat is allowed to dry.If the system operates incorrectly after the seat hasdried, have your dealer/retailer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seat cushionand seatback may interfere with the properoperation of the passenger sensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the servicemanual have information about servicing your vehicleand the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-16.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turnedoff and the battery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improper service. Youcan be injured if you are close to an airbag whenit inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They areprobably part of the airbag system. Be sure tofollow proper service procedures, and makesure the person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

1-66

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any partsof the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headlineror pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiringcan affect the operation of the airbag system.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passenger’s position,which includes sensors that are part of thepassenger’s seat. The passenger sensing systemmay not operate properly if the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, orwith GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for adifferent vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also

interfere with the operation of the passenger sensingsystem. This could either prevent proper deploymentof the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem on page 1-62.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about the location of the airbag sensors,sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

1-67

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can ripapart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get anew one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-102.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-33 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbag coverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 1-60. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

1-68

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraint systemmay not properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraint systemsare working properly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessary replacementsmade as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system (if equipped) parts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. Butthe belt assemblies that were used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailerto have your safety belt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was beingused during a crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thebelt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being usedat the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag system earlierin this section.

Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if yourvehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readinesslight stays on after you start your vehicle, or while youare driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-33.

1-69

✍ NOTES

1-70

Keys ...............................................................2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ...................................................2-5Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-8

Doors and Locks ............................................2-11Door Locks ..................................................2-11Power Door Locks ........................................2-11Delayed Locking ...........................................2-12Automatic Door Lock .....................................2-12Programmable Automatic Door Unlock .............2-12Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12Lockout Protection ........................................2-13Trunk ..........................................................2-14

Windows ........................................................2-17Power Windows ............................................2-18Sun Visors ...................................................2-19

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-20Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-20PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-22PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-22

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-24New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-24Ignition Positions ..........................................2-24Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-25Starting the Engine .......................................2-26Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-27Active Fuel Management™ .............................2-28Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-29Parking Brake ..............................................2-32Shifting Into PARK (P) ...................................2-33Shifting Out of PARK (P) ...............................2-35Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-36Engine Exhaust ............................................2-37Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37

Mirrors ...........................................................2-38Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-38Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-38Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-39Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® ............................................2-39Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-40Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-40Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-40

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Object Detection Systems ...............................2-41Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............2-41

OnStar ® System .............................................2-43Universal Home Remote System ......................2-47

Universal Home Remote System .....................2-47Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-48

Storage Areas ................................................2-52Glove Box ...................................................2-52Cupholder(s) ................................................2-52Center Console Storage .................................2-53Convenience Net ..........................................2-54

Sunroof .........................................................2-54

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-2

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons, childrenor others could be badly injured or even killed.They could operate the power windows orother controls or even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

The key can be used for the ignition and all locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retaileror qualified locksmith can use to make new keys.Store this information in a safe place, not in your vehicle.

The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system.The key has a transponder in the key head that matchesa decoder in the vehicle’s instrument panel. The key willhave PK3 stamped on it. If a replacement key or anadditional key is needed, it must be purchased from yourdealer/retailer or certified locksmith.

2-3

Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmedbefore it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key® IIIOperation on page 2-22 for more information onprogramming a new key.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-8 formore information.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates ona radio frequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closer toyour vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in thissection.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retaileror a qualified technician for service.

2-4

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functionswill work up to 195 feet (60 m) away, however, theoperating range may be less while the vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-4.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has thisfeature, press / to start the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2-8 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors. If enabledthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC), the parkinglamps may flash once to indicate locking has occurred,or the horn may chirp when Q is pressed againwithin five seconds from the previous press of the lockbutton. See “FOB LOCK FEEDBACK” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for additionalinformation. If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, pressing Q may also arm it. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-20.

" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " ispressed again within five seconds, all remainingdoors will unlock. The interior lamps will come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps canbe programmed to come on for a set amount of timewhen the vehicle is unlocked using the RKE transmitter.See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-76. If the vehicle hasthe content theft-deterrent system, pressing " on theRKE transmitter may disarm it. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 2-20.

With Remote StartShown, Without Remote

Start Similar

2-5

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold V forabout one second to release the trunk lid. Thetransmission must be in PARK (P) for this feature tooperate.

L (Panic Alarm): Press L to activate the alarm. Theheadlamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedlyfor two minutes. The alarm will turn off when theignition is moved to ON/RUN or L is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF orACC/ACCESSORY for the alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchasedthrough your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to bere-coded to match the new transmitter. The losttransmitter will no longer work after the new transmittersare re-coded. The vehicle can have a maximum offour transmitters matched to it.

2-6

Battery ReplacementReplace the battery if the KEY FOB BATT LOWmessage displays in the DIC. See “KEY FOB BATTERYLOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58for additional information.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter:

1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat,thin object inserted into the notch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.

2-7

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature thatallows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.It may also start the vehicle’s heating or air conditioningsystems and rear window defogger. When the remotestart system is active and the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, it will automatically regulatethe inside temperature. Normal operation of thesesystems will return after the ignition key is turned toON/RUN.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws may require aperson using remote start to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check local regulations for anyrequirements on remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle islow on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2-4 for additionalinformation.

/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if you have remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,then immediately press and hold the transmitter’sremote start button for about four seconds oruntil the vehicle’s turn signal lamps flash. The doorswill lock.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn onand remain on while the engine is running.

The remote start feature provides two separate startsper ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes of enginerunning time, or one start with a time extension. Thefirst start must expire or be canceled to get two separate10 minute starts.

If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has beendriven, repeat the previous steps, while the engine is stillrunning, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutesfrom the time you repeat the steps for remote starting.The remote start running time can be extended one timeand only after the first remote start.

2-8

After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insertand turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut off automatically after 10 minutes,unless a time extension has been done or thevehicle’s key is inserted into the ignition switch andturned to ON/RUN.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and pressand release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch out of LOCK/OFF positionand then back to LOCK/OFF.

The parking lamps turn off to indicate the engine is off.

After the engine has been started two times, or onetime with a time extension, the vehicle’s ignition must beturned to ON/RUN using the key before the remotestart procedure can be used again. See IgnitionPositions on page 2-24 for information regarding theignition positions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if anyof the follow occur:

• The remote start system is disabled through the DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• A door on the vehicle is open.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-42

2-9

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts, or one start with a timeextension, have already been provided for thatignition cycle.

If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful, theDriver Information Center (DIC) will display REMOTESTART DISABLED.

Vehicles that have the remote start feature are shippedfrom the factory with the remote vehicle start systemenabled. The system may be enabled or disabledthrough the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for additional

information. If your vehicle does not have the DICfeature, and remote vehicle start was installed at thedealer/retailer, you will need to have the dealer/retailerenable or disable the system.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle startfeature, it may have the remote start ready feature. Thisfeature allows your dealer/retailer to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.

See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to yourvehicle.

2-10

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can easily

open the doors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door is locked, the handlewill not open it. You increase the chanceof being thrown out of the vehicle in acrash if the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock the doorswhenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.

From the outside, turn the key in the driver’s doorlock cylinder briefly counterclockwise to unlock thedriver’s door. Turn and hold it to unlock all the doors.You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter.From the inside use the manual or power door locks.

Power Door Locks

To lock or unlock all doorsfrom inside the vehicle,use the power doorlock switch located oneither front door armrest.

Driver’s side shown

2-11

Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors. Pressthe top of the switch to unlock all doors.

If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,the vehicle is programmed to arm the system with thepower door lock switch. If your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC) this feature can be turned off.See “Content Theft” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 3-76.

Delayed LockingYour vehicle may have this feature. It delays the lockingof the vehicle’s doors for five seconds after the last dooris closed. Two chimes will sound when the power doorlock switch or the LOCK button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed when a door is open.If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), aDelayed Locking warning will be displayed.

The doors can be locked immediately by pressing thepower door lock switch or the LOCK button on thetransmitter a second time.

The delayed locking feature will not activate when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

You can program this feature on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC), if equipped. See“Delayed Locking” under DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 3-76.

Automatic Door LockThe vehicle’s doors are programmed to lock when theshift lever is moved into a forward gear.

If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle afterthe doors have been locked, place the shift lever intoPARK (P). You may also unlock all doors using the powerdoor lock switch or unlock one door using the insidemanual door lock.

The automatic door lock feature cannot be disabled.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlockThe vehicle’s doors are programmed from the factoryto unlock when the shift lever is moved into PARK (P).

On vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),there are different programming options for unlockingthe doors automatically. See DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 3-76.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks, that preventpassengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.

2-12

The rear door security locks are located on the insideedge of each rear door. You must open the rear doors toaccess them.

To assist you in finding the lock, your vehicle will haveone of the following:

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn itso the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

When you want to open a rear door when the securitylock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entrytransmitter, if the vehicle has one, the power doorlock switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn itso the slot is in the vertical position.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

Lockout ProtectionThe lockout protection feature makes it more difficultto lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is openwhile the key is in the ignition, the door cannot belocked with the power door lock switch.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will neverbe locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left inthe ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, thekey could still be locked inside the vehicle. Alwaysremember to take the key with you.

2-13

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You cannot see orsmell CO. It can cause unconsciousness andeven death. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See Climate ControlSystem.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 2-37.

Opening the TrunkTo open the trunk from the outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for moreinformation.

The ignition must be off, or the transmission must be inPARK (P) to open the trunk.

2-14

Remote Trunk ReleaseThis feature is used to unlock the trunk from inside thevehicle using the power door lock switch.

Press and hold the top ofthe driver’s power doorlock switch to unlockthe trunk.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to unlock the trunk.

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk releasehandle as a tie-down or anchor point when securingitems in the trunk as it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk release handle is onlyintended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk releasehandle located on the trunk latch of the trunk lid.This handle will glow following exposure to light. If everneeded, pull the emergency trunk release handle toopen the trunk from the inside.

2-15

Trunk Lid Pull Down Handle andTie-Down Features

Your vehicle has a trunk lid pull down handle (A)located on the inside of the trunk lid on the driver’s sideof the vehicle. Use the handle to pull down the trunklid when closing it.

On vehicles with a tie-down feature (B), it is locatedinside the trunk lid on the passenger’s side of the vehicleand can be used to secure the trunk lid when largeitems are stored in the trunk.

2-16

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave a child, ahelpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closed in warm orhot weather.

2-17

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome from extreme heat inwarm or hot weather and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons, childrenor others could be badly injured or even killed.They could operate the power windows orother controls or even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehicle withchildren.

When there are children in the rear seat usethe window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The switches on the driver’s door armrest are usedto control each of the windows. The power windowswitches work while the ignition is in ON/RUN,ACC/ACCESSORY, or while Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 2-25. Each passenger doorhas its own window switch.

To lower the window, press and hold the front of theswitch to the first position until the window is atthe desired level. To raise the window, pull up andhold the front of the switch.

2-18

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature labeled AUTO. This lets you lower the windowcompletely without holding the switch. Press the front ofthe switch to the second position and release.

To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly pull upon the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window switchesalso include a lockout switch. Press the right side of theswitch to prevent the rear passengers from usingtheir window switches. The driver can still control all thewindows and the front passenger can control theirown window with the lockout on. Press the left side ofthe switch to return to normal window operation. Ared bar on the right side of the switch indicates that thelockout is off.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors. Theycan be detached from the center retainer and slid alongthe rod to cover different areas of the front windowand turned to cover the side windows.

Visor Vanity MirrorSwing down the sun visors and lift the cover to exposethe vanity mirror. Do not drive with the cover lifteddue to possible glare impeding other drivers behind orto the side of the vehicle.

2-19

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

Your vehicle may have ared light located on top ofthe instrument panel,toward the center of thevehicle and near thewindshield, that will flashslowly when the system isarmed.

The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to be activatedthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC). See“CONTENT THEFT” under “Customization Menu Items”in DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76. Whilearmed, the doors will not unlock with the power door lockswitch. The remote alarm will sound if someone tamperswith the trunk or enters the vehicle without using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or key to unlockthe doors. The horn will sound and the headlamps willflash for up to two minutes. The system will also cut offthe fuel supply, preventing the vehicle from being driven.

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm system can beactivated when the key is removed from the ignition andthe power door lock switch of either the driver’s or frontpassenger’s door is used to lock the vehicle. The doorneeds to be in the open position when pressing the powerdoor lock switch. The system will not arm if the door isclosed when the power door lock switch is pressed. Thissystem can be activated through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “CONTENT THEFT” under“Customization Menu Items” in DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-76.

2-20

When the doors are locked using the power door lockswitch of either front door, the red light, if your vehicle hasone, will start flashing at a fast rate, indicating that thesystem is arming. After all the doors are locked there willbe a time delay and then the red light, if your vehicle hasone, will begin to flash at a very slow rate, indicating thesystem is armed.

Arming with the RKE TransmitterThe alarm system will arm when the RKE transmitter isused to lock the doors after the key is removed fromthe ignition. The red light, if your vehicle has one,will come on to indicate that the system is arming. Afterall doors are closed and locked, and after a timedelay, the red light, if your vehicle has one, will beginflashing at a very slow rate to show the system is armed.

Arming ConfirmationYour vehicle may have a red light located on top of theinstrument panel, towards the center of the vehicleand near the windshield, that will flash slowly to confirmwhen the system is armed.

Disarming with the RKE TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when the RKE transmitteris used to unlock the doors. The red light, if yourvehicle has one, will go out to show that the system isdisarmed.

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when the key is usedto unlock the doors. The red light, if your vehicle hasone, will stop flashing when the system is disarmed.If you would like the key to disarm the alarm system,see “CONTENT THEFT” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-76 for more information.

2-21

PASS-Key ® IIIYour PASS-Key® III system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.


1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.





PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder inthe key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.

PASS-Key ® III OperationYour vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armed when the key isremoved from the ignition.

You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.

The security light will come on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.

PASS-Key III® uses a transponder in the ignitionkey that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

When the PASS-Key® III system senses that the wrongkey has been inserted into the ignition, it shuts down thevehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will notwork and fuel will stop flowing to the engine. If someonetries to start the vehicle again with the wrong key, thevehicle will not start. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouraged to do sobecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does notstart and the STARTING DISABLED warning messageon the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, theremay be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

2-22

If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to beundamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, youmay also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-109. If the engine still does not startwith the other key, the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See yourdealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III to havea new key made. In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-8 for more information.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to acceptthe transponder value of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.The following procedure is for programming additionalkeys only. If all the programmed keys are lost or donot operate, see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III to have keys made andprogrammed to the system.

To program the new key do the following:

1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.

2. Insert the master key in the ignition and startthe engine. If the engine will not start, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK/OFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it toON/RUN within five seconds of removing theoriginal key.

5. The SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning messageon the DIC will turn off, once the key has beenprogrammed. It may not be apparent that theSERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning message wenton due to how quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are tobe programmed.

If the SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM warning messageappears and stays on the DIC while the vehicle is beingdriven, the engine will be able to be restarted if it is turnedoff. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, is not workingproperly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.The vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III systemat this time.

If the PASS-Key® III key is lost or stolen, see yourdealer/retailer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.

2-23

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast orslow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do notmake full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towinga Trailer on page 4-28 for the trailer towingcapabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load can begradually increased.

Ignition Positions

With the ignition key in theignition, the key can beturned to four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of PARK (P), the ignition must be inON/RUN and the regular brake pedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or break thekey. Use the correct key and turn the key only withyour hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. Ifnone of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which theignition key can be inserted or removed. This positionlocks the ignition and transmission. It is a theft-deterrentfeature.

2-24

If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to leftand turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none ofthis works, then your vehicle needs service.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets the radio andwindshield wipers operate while the engine is off. Touse ACC/ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise.

C (ON/RUN): This position is where the key returns toafter the vehicle is started. This position displayssome of the warning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with theengine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

D (START): This position starts the engine.

A warning chime will sound and the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will display DRIVER’S DOOR AJARwhen the driver’s door is opened if the ignition is inLOCK/OFF, ACC/ACCESSORY and the key is inthe ignition. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58 for more information.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is aneasy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key inthe ignition and park your vehicle, a chime will sound,when you open the driver’s door. Always remember toremove your key from the ignition and take it with you.This will lock your ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key in theignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not beable to start your vehicle after it has been parked for anextended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

Power to these accessories continues to work for10 minutes or until a door is opened.

2-25

Starting the EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position – this is asafety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it. Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow the oil to warm upand lubricate all moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in starting theengine and protects components. If the ignition keyis turned to the START position, and thenreleased when the engine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START for manyseconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running. Engine crankingcan be stopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

2-26

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods oftime, by returning the key to the START positionimmediately after cranking has ended, can overheatand damage the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,to let the cranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Trypushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floorand holding it there as you hold the key in START forup to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow the crankingmotor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go ofthe key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts brieflybut then stops again, do the same thing. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gently until the oil warms upand lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, yourengine might not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater, if available, can help in coldweather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easierstarting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours beforestarting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation at temperaturesabove 0°F (−18°C).

2-27

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. Thecord is attached to the underside of the diagonalbrace, which is located above the engine aircleaner/filter assembly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord willnot reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you do not, it could bedamaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer/retailer in the area where you will beparking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give youthe best advice for that particular area.

Active Fuel Management™Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active FuelManagement™. This system allows the engine tooperate on either all or half of its cylinders, dependingon your driving conditions.

When less power is required, such as cruising at aconstant vehicle speed, the system will operate in thehalf cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle to achievebetter fuel economy. When greater power demands arerequired, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintainfull-cylinder operation.

2-28

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your vehicle’s automatictransmission may have ashift lever on the steeringcolumn or on the consolebetween the seats.

There is also a displaylocated on the instrumentpanel cluster thatindicates the vehicle’s gearposition.

Console Shift Lever

2-29

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P) onpage 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-28.

The positions for the shift lever are:

PARK (P) : This position locks the vehicle’s frontwheels. It is the best position to use when the engine isstarted because the vehicle cannot move easily.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. The vehicle has an electronic shiftlock release system. You must fully apply the regularbrakes before shifting from PARK (P) when the ignitionis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing it all the wayinto PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.Then move the shift lever into another gear. See ShiftingOut of PARK (P) on page 2-35

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

To rock the vehicle back and forth in order to get it outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, orSnow on page 4-20.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does notconnect with the wheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when the vehicle is being towed.

2-30

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the brake pedal, yourvehicle could move very rapidly. You couldlose control and hit people or objects. Do notshift into a drive gear while your engine isrunning at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)with the engine running at high speed may damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is notrunning at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it ismoving slowly or not shifting gears as you increasespeed may damage the transmission. Have yourvehicle serviced right away. You can drive inSECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph(55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher speeds until then.

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If morepower is needed for passing, and the vehicle is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator pedal all the way down.

By doing this the vehicle will automatically shift downto the next gear and have more power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditionscould result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss ofControl on page 4-12.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.However it reduces vehicle speed more than DRIVE (D)without using your brakes. You might choose THIRD(3) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, windingroads, when towing a trailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears and when going down a steep hill.

2-31

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)may damage the transmission. Also, shifting intoSECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) cancause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D)instead of SECOND (2).

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed evenmore than THIRD (3) without using your brakes. You canuse SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speedas you go down steep mountain roads, but then youwould also want to use your brakes off and on.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed evenmore than SECOND (2) without using your brakes. Youcan use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow ormud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while thevehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shiftinto first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using only the acceleratorpedal may damage the transmission. The repair willnot be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake,hold the regular brakepedal down with your rightfoot. Push down theparking brake pedal withyour left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brakepedal down with your right foot and push the parkingbrake pedal with your left foot. While you lift yourleft foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to thereleased position.

A warning chime will sound and PARKING BRAKE ONwill display in the DIC if the parking brake is set, theignition is on, and the vehicle speed is greater than5 mph (8km/h). For more information see Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-37 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58.

2-32

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Make surethat the parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-28. That section shows whatto do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into PARK (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairly levelground, use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 4-28.

Steering Column Shift LeverIf your vehicle has a steering column shift lever, use thisprocedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling theshift lever toward you and moving it up as far as itwill go.

3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedaldown, set the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-32 for more information.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-33

Console Shift LeverIf your vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever,use this procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing thelever all the way toward the front of your vehicleand then to the left.

3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedaldown, set the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-32 for more information.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. SeeParking Brake on page 2-32 for more information.

2-34

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parking brake and thenshift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’sseat. To find out how, see Shifting Into PARK (P) onpage 2-33.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

Automatic Transmission Shift LockThis vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release is designed to:

• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever isin PARK (P)

• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK(P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock is always functional except in the case ofa an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)battery.

If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a batterywith low voltage, try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting on page 5-50.

2-35

Console ShiftIf your console shift lever cannot be moved out ofPARK (P)

1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN position. See IgnitionPositions on page 2-24 for more information.

3. Let up on the shift lever and make sure the shiftlever is pushed all the way into PARK (P).

4. Press the shift lever button

5. Then, move the shift into the desired gear.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice.

Column ShiftIf your column shift lever cannot be moved out ofPARK (P)

1. Apply and maintain the regular brakes.

2. Turn the ignition key to the ON/RUN position. SeeIgnition Positions on page 2-24 for more information.

3. Shift out of the PARK (P) position to theNEUTRAL (N) position.

4. Move the vehicle to a safe location.

If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Do notpark over papers, leaves, dry grass, or otherthings that can burn.

2-36

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot seeor smell. It can cause unconsciousness anddeath.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange or

different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

Running the Vehicle While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier caution underEngine Exhaust on page 2-37.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. SeeWinter Driving on page 4-17.

2-37

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle ifthe shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.Do not leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.You or others could be injured. To be sure yourvehicle will not move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set the parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on page 2-33.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-28.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhen you are sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it upor down and side to side. The day/night adjustmentallows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from thelamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime useand pull it for nighttime use.

Manual Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

The vehicle may have a mirror with Onstar®. While sittingin a comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so youcan see clearly behind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in thecenter to move it up and down and side to side.

The mirror has a day/night control located at the bottom.Turn the control to the right for the night position toreduce glare from other vehicles’ headlamps. Turn thecontrol to the front for the day position.

2-38

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-43 for moreinformation about the services OnStar® provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjustthe mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or downand side to side.

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearviewmirror that darkens gradually to reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind. Press the AUTO button locatedin the lower center of the mirror to turn automaticdimming on and the ( (off) button located next to theAUTO button to turn automatic dimming off.

One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when itis becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facingrearward, senses headlamps behind you.

To keep the photocells operating well, occasionallyclean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjustthe mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle.Hold the mirror in the center to move it up or downand side to side.

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearviewmirror with the OnStar® System. The automatic dimmingfeature is turned on or off by pressing the left button,located on the lower part of the mirror, for up tothree seconds. When turned on, this mirror functionslike the automatic dimming rearview mirror describedpreviously. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror onpage 2-39.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-43 for moreinformation about the services OnStar® provides.

2-39

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrors, arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

Move the selector switch located below the four-waycontrol pad to the left or right to choose either thedriver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. To adjust amirror, use the arrows located on the four-way controlpad to move the mirror in the desired direction.Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicleand the area behind it can be seen while sitting in acomfortable driving position. Keep the selector switch inthe center position when not adjusting either outsidemirror.

Outside Power Heated MirrorsFor information on the operation of the outside powermirrors see Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-40.

If the vehicle has heated mirrors, they will warm up tomelt ice and snow, and remove condensation when thedefroster is turned on. See Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 3-24 or Climate Control Systemon page 3-20.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’ssurface is curved so more can be seen from thedriver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,look farther away than they really are.

2-40

Object Detection Systems

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) system, it helps you park easier and avoid othervehicles while in REVERSE (R). It operates at speedsless than 3 mph (5 km/h). It can determine howclose objects are to the rear bumper, up to 5 feet (1.5 m)behind your vehicle. The distance sensors are locatedon the rear bumper.

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision. Itcannot detect:

• objects that are below the bumper,underneath the vehicle, or if they are tooclose or far from the vehicle

• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.



If you do not use proper care before and whilebacking; vehicle damage, injury, or deathcould occur. Even with URPA, always checkbehind your vehicle before backing up. Whilebacking, be sure to look for objects and checkyour vehicle’s mirrors.

The display is locatedabove the rear window andcan be seen by lookingover your right shoulder.

URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distanceand system information.

2-41

How the System WorksURPA comes on automatically when the shift lever ismoved into REVERSE (R). The rear display willthen briefly illuminate to let you know the system isworking.

URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph(5 km/h). If you are above this speed, the red light onthe rear display will flash.

To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objectsmust also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from your rearbumper. This distance may be less during warmer orhumid weather.

A single beep will sound the first time an object isdetected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m)away. Repeated beeping will occur when you arecloser than 20 inches (0.5 m) from the object.

The following describes what will occur with the URPAdisplay as you get closer to a detected object:

Description English Metricamber light 5 ft 1.5 m

amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 mamber/amber/red

lights/continuous beep 20 in 0.5 m

amber/amber/redlights flashing andcontinuous beep

1 ft 0.3 m

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean, a red URPA

display light may illuminate when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R). Keep your rear bumper free of mud,dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions,see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-102.

2-42

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycleor an object was hanging out of your trunk duringyour last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate.Once the attached object is removed, URPAwill return to normal operation.

• A tow bar is attached to your vehicle.

• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer to repair the system.

• Other conditions may affect system performance,such as vibrations from a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, after driving forward atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), take your vehicle to yourdealer/retailer.

OnStar ® System

OnStar uses several innovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,security, information, and convenience services. If yourairbags deploy, the system is designed to make anautomatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who canrequest emergency services be sent to your location.If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlockyour doors. If you need roadside assistance, pressthe OnStar button and they can contact RoadsideService for you.

2-43

OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStarTerms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStarservice at any time by contacting OnStar. A completeOnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStarSubscriber glove box literature. For more information,visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speakwith an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide theservices described below, or for a full description ofOnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStarOwner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,or the Directions & Connections Plan is included forone year from the date of purchase. You can extend thisplan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the Directions& Connections Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar button to speak with an advisor. SomeOnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or StolenVehicle Location Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar.

2-44

Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 complimentaryminutes

• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions& Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar Hands-Free CallingOnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStarsubscribers to make and receive calls using voicecommands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated intothe vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-PaidMinute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may alsobe linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, dependingon eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStarOwner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with anOnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar Virtual AdvisorOnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStarHands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to accesslocation-based weather, local traffic reports, andstock quotes. By pressing the phone button and givinga few simple voice commands, you can browsethrough the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’sGuide for more information (Only available in thecontinental U.S.).

2-45

OnStar Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can beused to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-102 formore information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button fora few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” toactivate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dialnumbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for moreinformation.

How OnStar Service WorksYour vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability ofrecording and transmitting vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent to an OnStar CallCenter at the time of an OnStar button press,Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACNsystem deploys. The vehicle information usually includesyour GPS location and, in the event of a crash,additional information regarding the accident that yourvehicle has been involved in (e.g. the direction fromwhich your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual

Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, yourvehicle also sends OnStar your GPS location so that wecan provide you with location-based services.

OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in aplace where OnStar has an agreement with a wirelessservice provider for service in that area. OnStarservice also cannot work unless you are in a placewhere the wireless service provider OnStar has hired forthat area has coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology that iscompatible with the OnStar service. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularly in remote orenclosed areas, or at all times.

Location information about your vehicle is only availableif the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed andavailable.

Your vehicle must have a working electrical system(including adequate battery power) for the OnStarequipment to operate. There are other problems OnStarcannot control that may prevent OnStar from providingOnStar service to you at any particular time or place.Some examples are damage to important parts of yourvehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather or wireless phone network congestion.

2-46

Your ResponsibilityIncrease the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStaradvisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red,this means that your system is not functioning properlyand should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If thelight appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired. You can always press theOnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment isactive.

Universal Home RemoteSystemThe Universal Home Remote System provides a way toreplace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)transmitters used to activate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, and home lighting.




The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificatenumber is CB2SAHL3.




The Canadian Registration ID number is 2791021849A.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

2-47

Universal Home Remote SystemOperation

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)indicator light above the Universal Home Remotebuttons, follow the instructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activate devicessuch as garage door openers, security systems,and home automation devices.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the Universal Home Remote. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in the programmingthe Universal Home Remote.

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in othervehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remoteprogramming. It is also recommended that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmed Universal HomeRemote buttons should be erased for security purposes.See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” laterin this section.

When programming a garage door, park outside of thegarage. Park directly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Besure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

2-48

Programming the Universal HomeRemote SystemIf you have questions or need help programming theUniversal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 orgo to www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow these actions, thedevice will time out and you will have to repeat theprocedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Programming can only occur with the vehicle inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and until 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off.

2. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down thetwo outside buttons at the same time, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remote indicatorlight begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or all previouslyprogrammed buttons.Do not hold down the buttons for longer than30 seconds and do not repeat this step to programthe remaining two Universal Home Remotebuttons.

3. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the UniversalHome Remote buttons while keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-held transmitter was suppliedby the manufacturer of your garage door openerreceiver (motor head unit).

2-49

4. At the same time, press and hold both the UniversalHome Remote button that you would like to use tocontrol the garage door and the hand-heldtransmitter button. Do not release the UniversalHome Remote button or the hand-held transmitterbutton until Step 4 has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

5. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remotewill flash slowly at first and then rapidly afterUniversal Home Remote successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

6. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal HomeRemote button and observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,the programming is complete and your garage doorshould move when the Universal Home Remotebutton is pressed and released. You do not need tocontinue the programming Steps 6 through 8 andcan stop here.If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds and then turns to aconstant light, continue with the programming Steps6 through 8.

It may be helpful to have another person availableto assist with the remaining steps.

7. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,locate inside the garage the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. The name and color of the buttonmay vary by manufacturer.

8. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. After you press this button, you will have30 seconds to complete Step 8.

2-50

9. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press andhold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen inStep 3 to control the garage door, for twoseconds, and then release it. If the garage doordoes not move, press and hold the same button asecond time for two seconds, and then releaseit. Again, if the door does not move, press and holdthe same button a third time for two seconds,and then release.The Universal Home Remote should now activatethe garage door.

To program the remaining two Universal Home Remotebuttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming theUniversal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1,as this will erase all previous programming from theUniversal Home Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingIf you have questions or need help programming theUniversal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 orgo to www.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough for UniversalHome Remote to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufacturedto time out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming Universal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remotebutton while you press and release every two seconds(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until thefrequency signal has been successfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remoteindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming UniversalHome Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remotebutton for at least half of a second. The indicator lightwill come on while the signal is being transmitted.

Operation can only occur with the vehicle inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN and until 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned off.

2-51

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsErase the programmed buttons when you sell orterminate your lease.

To erase all programmed buttons on the UniversalHome Remote device:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remotebuttons, repeat the programming instructions earlierin this section, beginning with Step 2.For help or information on the Universal Home RemoteSystem, call the customer assistance phone numberunder Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

Cupholder(s)

If your vehicle is thefive-passenger model,there is a cupholder in frontof the center console.

2-52

The cupholder has an arm that adjusts to two positionsto fit either a large cup or two smaller cups.

If your vehicle is the six-passenger model, there is acupholder located underneath the seat. To access, pullthe center seat forward. The cupholder has a supportthat adjusts to two positions to fit either a large cupor two smaller cups.

Center Console StorageIf your vehicle has a five-passenger console, the centerconsole has a padded lid that can be used as anarmrest. Lift the armrest lid to access a storage bin witha coin holder and a CD holder. Located under the lidis a card clip.

If your vehicle has a six-passenger console, there is aflip and fold center armrest that allows you to choosebetween a three-passenger front row bench seat or acenter console. For more information see Center Seat onpage 1-7. In the upward position the armrest acts as aback support for the front row bench seat. Flip the centerarmrest down and it can be used as an armrest for thedriver and passenger seat. Lift the armrest lid to accessthe storage area.

2-53

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net in the rearof the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward aspossible. The net should not be used to store heavyloads.

SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroof. It includes a slidingglass panel and a sunshade.

The sunroof control is onthe headliner, by the maplamps.

The sunroof control works only when the ignition is onor in ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 2-25.

To raise the sunroof to the vent position, open thesunshade by hand, then press the back of the control.Push and hold the front of the control to close thesunroof from the vent position.

With the sunroof in the vent position, press and releasethe back of the control to express-open the sunroof.The sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof.To stop the express-open function, press the backof the control again.

To close the sunroof, press and hold the front of thecontrol. To stop the sunroof, release the control.The sunshade must be closed manually.

The sunroof panel cannot be opened or closed if yourvehicle has an electrical failure.

2-54

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-8Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9Windshield Washer .........................................3-9Cruise Control ..............................................3-10Exterior Lamps .............................................3-13Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .......................3-14Fog Lamps ..................................................3-15Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-15Interior Lamps ..............................................3-16Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-16Entry Lighting ...............................................3-16Delayed Entry Lighting ...................................3-17Theater Dimming ..........................................3-17Delayed Exit Lighting .....................................3-17Perimeter Lighting .........................................3-17Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................3-18Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................3-18

Electric Power Management ...........................3-18Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-19Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-19Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-20

Climate Controls ............................................3-20Climate Control System .................................3-20Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-24Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-28Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-29

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-30Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-31Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-32Tachometer .................................................3-32Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-32Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-33Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-34Charging System Light ..................................3-36Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-37Antilock Brake System

Warning Light ...........................................3-38Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ...........................................3-38Enhanced Traction System

Warning Light ...........................................3-39Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-40Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-40

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-41Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-41Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-42Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-45Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-45Security Light ...............................................3-45Cruise Control Light ......................................3-46Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-46Highbeam On Light .......................................3-46Headlamps Suggested Light ...........................3-47Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-47Door Ajar Light .............................................3-47Trunk Ajar Light ............................................3-47Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-48Fuel Gage ...................................................3-48Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-48Check Gas Cap Light ....................................3-49

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-50DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) ..........................3-56DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-58DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-76

Audio System(s) .............................................3-84Setting the Clock ..........................................3-85Radio(s) ......................................................3-86Using an MP3 ..............................................3-97XM Radio Messages ...................................3-100Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-101Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-102Radio Reception .........................................3-103Backglass Antenna ......................................3-104XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-105Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-105

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-28.B. Interior Lamps Control. See Interior Lamps on

page 3-16.C. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on

page 3-13. Fog Lamp Control. See Fog Lamps onpage 3-15.

D. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

E. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control on page 3-10.F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 3-31.G. DIC Buttons (If Equipped) and Hazard Warning

Flasher Button. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-50 and Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 3-6.

H. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 3-34.

I. Audio System Controls. See Audio System(s) onpage 3-84.

J. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.K. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.L. Tilt Lever (If Equipped) and Telescoping Column

Lever (If Equipped). See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.M. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See

Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-102.O. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into PARK (P) on

page 2-33.P. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power

Outlet(s) on page 3-19.Q. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System on

page 3-20 or Dual Automatic Climate Control Systemon page 3-24.

R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-52.

3-5

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn the police andothers that you have a problem. The front and rearturn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is on theinstrument panel.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press again to turn theflashers completely off.

The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelIf the vehicle has a tilt wheel the steering wheel can beadjusted to a higher or lower position. Do not adjustthe tilt wheel while driving.

The lever used to tilt thesteering wheel is locatedon the left side of thesteering column.

To tilt the wheel, pull the lever towards you, move thewheel to a comfortable position, and then releasethe lever to lock the wheel in place.

3-6

Telescoping ColumnIf the vehicle has a telescoping column on the steeringwheel it adjusts the distance of the steering wheelto the driver without having to move the driver’s seat.

The lever that makes thisadjustment is located onthe left side of the steeringcolumn and behind thetilt lever, if the vehicle hasthis feature.

To adjust the steering wheel, pull the steering wheelcolumn lever down and push or pull the steering wheelto a comfortable position. Then pull the lever up tolock the wheel in place.

Do not drive the vehicle unless the telescoping columnis locked.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and

Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-8.

• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers onpage 3-9.

• LQ Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washeron page 3-9.

For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lampson page 3-13.

3-7

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the lever up or down. The leverreturns to its original position when the turn is completed.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever untilthe arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. The lever will return to its originalposition when released.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn orlane change, or that fail to work, may indicate aburned-out signal bulb or fuse. Other drivers will not seethe signal. See Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on page 5-59 for turnsignal bulb replacement procedures. Also see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 5-109 for location of fuses.

A chime will sound if the turn signal is left on for morethan 3/4 mile (1.2 km).

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.

This light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster ifthe high beam lampsare turned on while theignition is in ON/RUN.

To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,pull the turn signal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beam headlampsmomentarily to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever towardyou until the high-beam headlamps come on, thenrelease the lever to turn them off.

3-8

Windshield WipersClear ice and snow from the wiper blades before usingthem. If they are frozen to the windshield, gentlyloosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may notclear the windshield well, making it harder to seeand drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-62.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control thewindshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band onmist longer, for more wipe cycles.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. Thedelay between wiping cycles becomes shorter asthe band is moved to the top of the lever. This can bevery useful in light rain or snow.

6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from you tothe first solid band past the delay settings, for steadywiping at low speed.

? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to thesecond solid band past the delay settings, forhigh-speed wiping.

Windshield Washer

LQ (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the top ofthe multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clearthe window and then either stop or return to yourpreset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

3-9

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, donot use your cruise control on winding roadsor in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tiretraction can cause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

If your vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS)and the cruise control is on, TCS will begin to limit wheelspin and the cruise control automatically turns off.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. Whenroad conditions allow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turned back on.

The cruise control buttonsare located on outboardside of the steering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruise controlon and off. The indicator is lit when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button tomake the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previouslyset speed.

SET–: Press this button to set the speed or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise control.

3-10

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, orif the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

The cruise control light on the instrument panel clustercomes on after the cruise control has been set tothe desired speed. See Instrument Panel Cluster onpage 3-31.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when youare not using cruise, you might hit a buttonand go into cruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and even lose control.Keep the cruise control switch off until youwant to use cruise control.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET– button located on thesteering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf cruise control is set at a desired speed and thebrakes are applied, this shuts off the cruise control.However, it does not need to be reset.

Once your vehicle reaches a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press the +RES buttonon the steering wheel. The vehicle goes back tothe previously selected speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the +RES button on the steeringwheel until you reach your new desired speed,then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button. Each time this is done,the vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

3-11

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on the steeringwheel until you reach the desired lower speed,then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.Each time this is done, the vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise speed youset earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hills dependsupon the vehicle speed, load and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills, you might have tostep on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. If the brakesare applied the cruise control will turn off. Many driversfind this to be too much trouble and do not usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ button on the steering wheel.

• Press the T button on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

3-12

Exterior Lamps

The control located to theleft of the cluster on theinstrument panel, operatesthe exterior lamps.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

P (On/Off): Briefly turn the control to this position toturn off the automatic light control. Briefly turn to thisposition again to turn automatic light control on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position toautomatically turn on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



< (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the parking lamps together with thefollowing:

• Taillamps



3-13

2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position toturn on the headlamps together with the following lampslisted below.

A warning chime will sound if the driver’s door isopened when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK/OFFor ACC/ACCESSORY and the headlamps or parkinglamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



- (Foglamps) (If Equipped): Push the fog lampsbutton to turn them on and off. See Fog Lamps onpage 3-15 for additional information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRLcan be helpful in many different driving conditions, butthey can be especially helpful in the short periods afterdawn and before sunset. DRL lamps are required tofunction at all times on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes theDRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system will make the low-beam headlampscome on at reduced brightness when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is off.

• The parking brake is released.

While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beamheadlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The turnsignal, taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not beon. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.

3-14

When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn offand the vehicle’s headlamps and parking lamps will turnon. The other lamps that come on with the headlampswill also come on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will gooff and the DRL will come on.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exteriorlamp control off and then do one of the following:

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parking lampposition.

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlampposition.

• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO to off andback to AUTO.

This feature is not available for vehicles first sold inCanada.

To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when it isdark outside, move the exterior lamp control to theparking lamp position. The parking lamps remain on andthe headlamps turn off. The fog lamps also go on ifthey were on previously.

As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has foglamps, the button islocated in the center of theexterior lamps controlon the left side ofthe steering column.

Press the fog lamps button to turn the lamps on or off.

While the high-beam headlamps are on, the foglamps are off.

Some localities have laws that require the headlamps tobe on along with the fog lamps.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have been left onafter the ignition has been turned to off, the exteriorlamps will turn off after about 10 minutes. This protectsthe battery from being drained.

Use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on,if they are still needed.

3-15

Interior Lamps

Your interior lampscontrol is located next tothe exterior lampscontrol and to the left ofthe steering wheel onthe instrument panel.

9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to disablecourtesy lamps, entry lighting, delayed entry lighting, anddelayed exit lighting.

1 (Door): Turn the control to this position to turn theinterior lamps on when any door is open and whenthe ignition key is removed from the ignition.

+ (On): Turn the control to this position to turn onthe interior lamps.

The interior lamps can be controlled, or automaticallyturned on or off under certain conditions. They areexplained in the following text.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThe instrument panel lights can be brightened ordimmed by pressing the center knob of the interior lampcontrols until it pops out. Turn the knob clockwise tobrighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them.

Courtesy LampsCourtesy lamps come on to make it easier to enter andexit the vehicle. These lamps will come on when theinterior lamp control is in the door position and any dooris opened.

Entry LightingThe courtesy lamps come on and stay on for a set timewhenever the interior lamp control is in the doorposition and the UNLOCK button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.

The lamps stay on while a door is opened and then turnoff automatically about 25 seconds after it is closed. Ifthe UNLOCK button is pressed and a door is notopened, the lamps will turn off after about 25 seconds.

The courtesy lamps turn off when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN or START. They will come on againwhen a door is opened.

3-16

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting lights the vehicle’s interior for aperiod of time after all the doors have been closed.

After all the doors have been closed, the delayed entrylighting feature will continue to work until one of thefollowing occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.

• The doors are locked.

• 25 seconds has passed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened, thetimed illumination period will be canceled and the interiorlamps will remain on.

Theater DimmingThis feature allows for a three to five second fade out ofthe courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off.

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature can be programmed either on or off usingthe Driver Information Center. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-76 under INT (Interior)LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED. When activated, the interiorwill be lit for a short period of time after the ignitionkey is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off and the interior lamp controlmust be in the door position for delayed exit lighting towork. When the ignition key is removed, interiorillumination will activate and remain on until one of thefollowing occurs:

• The ignition is in ON/RUN.

• The power door locks are activated.

• 25 seconds has passed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened, thetimed illumination period will be canceled and the interiorlamps will remain on.

Perimeter LightingPerimeter lighting provides a period of exterior vehiclelighting. Perimeter lighting activates when the keyis removed from the ignition or the vehicle is unlockedusing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.The amount of time the exterior lamps will remain oncan be programmed using the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See “EXIT LIGHT DELAY” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 3-76 for additionalinformation.

3-17

Overhead Console Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps located onthe overhead console. Press the lens to turn them onand off.

Rear Assist Handle Reading LampsYour vehicle may have reading lamps located nearthe rear assist handles. Press the lens to turn them onand off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) thatestimates the battery’s temperature and state ofcharge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage israised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When thestate of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gageor voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC),you may see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electricalloads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This isbecause the generator (alternator) may not bespinning fast enough at idle to produce all the powerthat is needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at highspeed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailerloads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’s outputand the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increaseengine idle speed to generate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce the power demands ofsome accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, withoutbeing noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levelsof corrective action, this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, the Driver Information Center (DIC)message might display Battery Saver Active. If thismessage is displayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58.

3-18

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis helps prevent the vehicle’s battery from drainingin case the interior courtesy lamps, reading lamps, trunklamp, underhood lamp, glove box lamps, or sun visorvanity lamps, if equipped, are accidently left on.If any of these lamps are left on while the ignition is off,they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. Thelamps will not come back on again until one of thefollowing occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The interior lamps control is turned off, then to dooror on.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets enable power electricalequipment such as a cellular telephone or a CB radio tobe used inside the vehicle.

Your vehicle has 12-volt outlets. One outlet is locatedon the center console below the climate controls. Theremay be another outlet located inside the centerstorage console or in the flip and fold console.

Open the cover to use the outlet. Be sure to close thecover when the outlet is not in use.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to yourvehicle may damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatibleto the power accessory outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer/retailer.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by your warranty. Do nothang any type of accessory or accessory bracketfrom the plug because the power outlets aredesigned for accessory power plugs only.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in foran extended period of time while the vehicle is offwill drain the battery. Power is always suppliedto the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

3-19

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a removable ashtray andcigarette lighter. The cigarette lighter may be locatedunder the climate control system. The removable ashtraycan be placed into the front console cupholder.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammableitems in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage your vehicle. Never put flammable items inthe ashtray.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, andlet go. When the heating element is ready, it willpop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it isheating will not allow the lighter to back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating may occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do notuse equipment exceeding maximum amperage ratingof 20 amperes.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, coolingand ventilation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature and it isactivated, the climate control system will automaticallycool the vehicle if the temperature is greater than90°F (32°C) and heat the vehicle if the temperature isbelow 37°F (3°C). If the temperature is between37°F (3°C) and 90°F (32°C), the last control settingselected when the engine was running will be used.Normal operation and the last setting of the climatecontrol system will return after the key is turned to theON/RUN position.

3-20

Operation

OFF: Turn the left knob to this position to turn theclimate control system off.

9 (Fan): Turn the knob by this symbol, located onthe left side of the climate control panel, clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thefan speed. The fan speed will be temporarily reducedbetween the transition to a new mode. The fan willresume the original speed when the transition to the newmode is complete.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature inside your vehicle.

Use the right knob to select from the following modes:

H (Vent): This mode directs outside air to theinstrument panel outlets. If driving in city traffic, and thevehicle is stopped and idling, or the weather is hot,turning on the recirculation mode helps to prevent theair inside the vehicle from becoming stale. After fiveminutes recirculate will allow some outside air into thevehicle.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to theinstrument panel outlets, and the remaining air tothe floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward thewindshield. Slightly cooler air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and warmer air is directed tothe floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets with some air directed toward the sidewindow outlets and a little air directed to the windshield.

In this mode, the system will automatically use outsideair. The air conditioning compressor will be engagedunless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or below.

3-21

You can also select modes by using the followingbuttons:

h (Recirculate): Press this button to recirculatecabin air through the vehicle. It can be used tohelp reduce the outside air and odors that enter yourvehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehiclequicker. An indicator light below the button will comeon in this mode. Operation in this mode during periods ofhigh humidity and cool outside temperatures mayresult in increased window fogging. If window fogging isexperienced, select the defrost mode. To prevent theair inside the vehicle from becoming stale, afterfive minutes recirculate will allow some outside air intothe vehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn theair conditioning system on or off. When this buttonis pressed, an indicator light below the button will comeon to let you know the air conditioning is activated.Air conditioning can be selected in any mode as long asthe fan switch is on. The indicator light will changewith each button press even when conditions preventoperation.

On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up, openthe windows to let hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps to reduce the time it takes forthe vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system tooperate more efficiently.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent air mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select the air conditioner.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idlingor after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Using these settings together for long periods of timemay cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry.To prevent this, after five minutes recirculate willallow some outside air into the vehicle.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of high humiditycausing moisture to condense on the cool window glass.This can be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to clear frost or fogfrom the windshield. Use the defog mode to clear thewindows of condensation and to warm the vehicle’soccupants. Use the defrost mode to remove frost orcondensation from the windshield quickly.

See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this section forinformation on clearing the rear window of fog or ice.

3-22

Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets and half tothe floor outlets. When you select this mode, the systemturns recirculation off and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is near orbelow freezing. Pressing the recirculation buttonwill have no effect other than turning on the indicatorlight while in defog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and the side window outlets, with someair directed to the floor outlets. When you select thismode, the system turns recirculation off and runs the airconditioning compressor unless the outside temperatureis near or below freezing. Pressing the recirculationbutton will have no effect other than turning onthe indicator light while in defrost mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator light below the button willcome on to let you know that the rear window defoggeris activated.

The rear window defogger will only work when the ignitionis in ON/RUN. The rear window defogger will stay on forabout 20 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned onagain, the defogger will only run for about 20 minutesbefore turning off. The defogger can also be turned off bypressing the button again or by turning off the engine.


Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut ordamage the warming grid, and the repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not attach atemporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

3-23

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system you can control the heating, cooling,and ventilation for the vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Press the AUTO button forautomatic control of the inside temperature, the airdelivery mode, and the fan speed. There might be adelay of two to three minutes before the fan comes onwhen the automatic operation is used in cold weather.For the automatic system to function, the temperaturemust be set between 61°F (15°C) and 89°F (32°C).

1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting.

2. Press the PASS button or the up or down arrows onthe passenger side to turn the passengertemperature set on and off. When turned on, thepassenger temperature will be the same as the driversetting. Press the up or down arrow on passengerside to adjust the passenger temperature setting.When the passenger’s temperature set is off, thepassenger display will be off and the driver’sset temperature will be for the driver and passenger.In cold weather, the system will start at reducedfan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicleuntil warmer air is available. The system will startout blowing air at the floor but may changemodes automatically as the vehicle warms up tomaintain the chosen temperature setting. The lengthof time needed for warm up will depend on theoutside temperature and the length of time that haselapsed since the vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from10 to 30 minutes. Then, adjust the temperature, ifnecessary.Do not cover the solar sensor located in the centerof the instrument panel, near the windshield. Formore information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors”later in this section.

3-24

4. Press OFF to turn the climate control system off.Only the rear defog and heated seats will function.Press AUTO or any other button except theheated seats or rear defog to turn the climatecontrol system back on.

This control has four types of operation.

• Automatic can set/change the temperature only.AUTO and temperature only will appear on thedisplay.

• Semi-Automatic Fan can set/change thetemperature and mode. The fan operatesautomatically. The temperature and mode willappear on the display.

• Semi-Automatic Mode can set/change thetemperature and fan speed. The mode operatesautomatically. The fan speed and temperature willappear on the display.

• Manual can set/change the temperature, mode andfan. The fan speed, temperature, and mode willappear on the display.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the climatecontrol system will automatically regulate the insidetemperature of your vehicle when the remote startsystem is activated. Normal operation and the lastsetting of the climate control system will return after thekey is turned on.

Manual OperationDuring daylight hours, the instrument panel brightnesscontrol might need to be adjusted to the highest setting,in order to see the indicator lights for the variousclimate control settings.

OFF: Press this button to turn the climate controlsystem off.

yz (Temperature): Press these buttons to manuallyadjust the temperature inside the vehicle. Press theup arrow on the driver or passenger side to raisethe temperature, and press the down arrow to lower thetemperature. The display will show the selectedtemperature.

z9 (Fan): Press this button to decrease the fanspeed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automaticoperation and places the system in manual orsemi-automatic mode. Press the AUTO button to returnto automatic operation. If the airflow seems low whenthe fan is at the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter may need to be replaced. Formore information see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 3-29 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

3-25

9y (Fan): Press this button to increase the fanspeed. Pressing the arrows cancels the automaticoperation and places the system in manual orsemi-automatic mode. Press the AUTO button to returnto automatic operation. If the airflow seems low whenthe fan is at the highest setting, the passengercompartment air filter may need to be replaced. Formore information see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 3-29 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor, with some air directed to the side windowoutlets and a small amount to the windshield.

) (Bi-Level): This setting directs airflow to theinstrument panel and floor outlets. A small amount of airis also directed to the windshield and the side windowoutlets.

Y (Vent): This mode directs air through the instrumentpanel outlets.

h (Recirculation): Press this button to turnrecirculation mode on or off. This mode keeps outsideair from coming into the vehicle. It can be used tohelp reduce the outside air and odors that enter yourvehicle or help cool the air inside the vehicle quicker.

Recirculation is not available while in the floor, defrost,or floor/defog modes. Using recirculation for longperiods of time may cause the air inside your vehicle tobecome too dry. Recirculation mode has a five minutetimer after which the system allows for some freshoutside air into the vehicle to maintain interior air quality.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn theair conditioning compressor on and off. The indicatorlight on the button will come on when the air conditioningis on. The indicator light will change with each buttonpress even when conditions prevent operation.

( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn the driveror passenger heated seats on and off. See HeatedSeats on page 1-3 for additional information.

3-26

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. Thiscan be minimized if the climate control system isused properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture and warmthe passengers. Use defrost to remove fog or frost fromthe windshield more quickly.

- (Floor/Defog): Press this button to direct the airbetween the windshield, floor outlets and side windows.When you select this mode, the system turnsrecirculation off and runs the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature is near or belowfreezing. Pressing the recirculation button will have noeffect other than turning on the indicator light whilein floor/defog mode.

1 (Defrost): Press this button to direct most of theair to the windshield, with some air directed to theside windows. In this mode, the system will automaticallyturn off the recirculation and run the air conditioningcompressor, unless the outside temperature is near orbelow freezing. Pressing the recirculation button willhave no effect other than turning on the indicator lightwhile in defrost mode.


SensorsThe solar sensor on the vehicle monitors the solar heatand the air inside of the vehicle. This information isused to maintain the selected temperature by initiatingneeded adjustments to the temperature, the fanspeed, and the air delivery system. The system mayalso supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing thesun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, asnecessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel, near the windshield,or the system will not work properly.

3-27

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window. The rearwindow defogger will only work when the engineis running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button toturn the rear window defogger on and off. Be sureto clear as much snow from the rear window as possible.

The rear window defogger will turn off about 20 minutesafter the button is pressed. If turned on again, thedefogger will only run for about 20 minutes beforeturning off. The defogger can also be turned offby pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.These actions may damage the rear defogger.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheels located between the centeroutlets to open and close the outlets. Move the lever inthe center of each air outlet to adjust the direction ofthe airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside of the vehicle moreeffectively.

• This vehicle has a passenger compartment air filter.If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting it may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment AirFilter on page 3-29.

3-28

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter is located inthe engine compartment below the air inlet grille, nearthe passenger’s side windshield wiper arm. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12.

The filter traps most of the pollen from the air enteringthe air conditioning module. The filter needs to bechanged periodically to keep the air conditioning workingat its best. For information on how often to changethe passenger compartment air filter, see ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

To change the passenger compartment air filter, use thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and turn thewindshield wipers on.

2. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF when the windshieldwipers are in the upright position.

3. Raise the hood.

4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose fromthe fender rail and air inlet grille.

5. Peel back the hood weather-strip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to the centerof the hood.

6. Remove the three air inlet grille retainers.

7. Remove the air inlet grille.

8. Remove the water deflector panel.

3-29

9. Remove the old air filter.

10. Install a new passenger compartment air filter. SeeMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13 forthe type of filter to use. Make sure it slidesunder the compartment retainers.

11. Reverse Steps 1 through 8.

For best climate control performance, re-installation of aclean air filter is required.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages that maybe on the vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could also save you orothers from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, some warninglights come on briefly when you start the engine just to letyou know they are working. If you are familiar with thissection, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gages showsthere may be a problem, check the section that tells youwhat to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and evendangerous. So please get to know the warning lights andgages. They are a big help.

3-30

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let the driver know at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will showhow fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank and many other things needed to drive safelyand economically.

Base level shown, Uplevel similar

3-31

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the driverinformation center. You can set a Trip A and Trip Bodometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-50.

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the odometer/trip switchon the instrument panel cluster.

If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, thenew one will be set to the correct mileage total of theold odometer.

TachometerYour tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is started, a chime will come on forseveral seconds to remind people to fasten their safetybelts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor several seconds, then itwill flash for several more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driver remainsunbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s beltis already buckled, neither the chime nor the light willcome on.

3-32

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder LightSeveral seconds after the engine is started, a chimewill sound for several seconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safety belt. This would onlyoccur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-62 for more information.The passenger safety belt light, located on theinstrument panel, will come on and stay on for severalseconds and then flash for several more.

This chime and light arerepeated if the passengerremains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither thechime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. The system check includes the airbagsensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, thewiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbag system, see AirbagSystem on page 1-54.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Thelight should go out and thesystem is ready.

3-33

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, yourairbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the airbag systemmay not be working properly. The airbags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, have your vehicleserviced right away if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you start the engine. If the light does notcome on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is aproblem with the airbag system, an airbag DriverInformation Center (DIC) message may also come on.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 formore information.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When you start thevehicle, the passengerairbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF forseveral seconds asa system check.

If you use remote start to start your vehicle from adistance, if equipped, you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF to let you know thestatus of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the right front passenger’s frontalairbag is enabled (may inflate).

3-34

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you have arear-facing child restraint installed in the rightfront passenger’s seat, it means that thepassenger sensing system has not turned offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in arear-facing child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front passenger’sairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very closeto the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facingchild restraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in therear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If the word OFF is lit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 1-62 for more on this,including important safety information.

3-35

If, after several seconds, both status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or the passenger sensingsystem. See your dealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in the instrumentpanel cluster ever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may be wrong with theairbag system. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have the protectionof the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-33 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turn onthe ignition key, butthe engine is not running,as a check to showyou it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If it stayson, or comes on while driving, there could be a problemwith the charging system. A charging system DriverInformation Center (DIC) message may also appear.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58for more information. This light could indicate that thereare problems with a generator drive belt, or thatthere is an electrical problem. Have it checked rightaway. If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all the accessories, such as theradio and air conditioner.

3-36

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part is not working, the other part canstill work and stop you. For good braking, though, youneed both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on and the parking brake isnot applied, there is a brake problem. Have yourbrake system inspected right away.

This light should come onbriefly when you turn theignition key to ON/RUN.

If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will beready to warn you if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when you set your parking brake.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesnot release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, a chime willsound and you should pull off the road and stopcarefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder topush. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. Itmay take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicleon page 4-27.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you have pulled off the road andstopped carefully, have the vehicle towed forservice.

3-37

Antilock Brake SystemWarning Light

For vehicles withthe Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this lightcomes on briefly when theengine is started.

That is normal. If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if thereis a problem.

If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the lightcomes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignition off. Then startthe engine again to reset the system. If the ABS lightstill stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, your vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on, your vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is a problem withthe regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-37.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), seeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-58 for allbrake related DIC messages.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle has a TractionControl System (TCS)warning light.

If this warning light comes on and stays on, there maybe a problem with the TCS and, if your vehicle hasthis feature, the StabiliTrak® system.

3-38

The TCS warning light will come on briefly when theengine is started. If it does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem. This light will also come on when the tractioncontrol button is pressed disabling the system.

If the TCS warning light stays on or comes on while youare driving, pull off the road as soon as possible andstop carefully. Try resetting the system by turningthe ignition off then back on. If the light still stays on orcomes back on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. Have the traction control systemand, if your vehicle has this feature, the StabiliTrak®

system inspected as soon as possible. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-6 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-8 for more information.

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

For vehicles with theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If the traction control button located on the centerconsole is pressed, turning the system off. Thislight will come on and stay on. To turn the systemback on, press the button again and the warninglight should turn off. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 4-7.

• If the system is affected by an engine-relatedproblem, the system will turn off and the warninglight will come on.

If the light comes on and stays on for an extendedperiod of time when the system is turned on, the vehicleneeds service.

3-39

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warning lightwill come on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn off theengine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-30 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperaturewarning light on could cause your vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not becovered by your warranty. Never drive with theengine coolant temperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when starting yourvehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

The vehicle has a gagethat shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves towards the H, the engine istoo hot.

This reading indicates the same thing as the warninglight. It means that the engine coolant has overheated.If the vehicle has been operating under normaldriving conditions, pull off the road, stop the vehicle,and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 5-30.

3-40

Low Coolant Warning Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it comes on brieflywhen you turn your ignitionon as a bulb check only.

Tire Pressure Light

Your vehicle has a tirepressure light.

This light comes on briefly when the engine is startedand provides information about tire pressures andthe Tire Pressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is SolidThis indicates that one or more of your tires aresignificantly underinflated.

A tire pressure message in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), may accompany the light. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-58 for moreinformation. Stop and check your tires as soon as it issafe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 5-63 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First and Thenis SolidThis indicates that there may be a problem with the TirePressure Monitor System. The light flashes for abouta minute and stays on solid for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with everyignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 5-71 for more information.

3-41

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makessure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life ofthe vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

The check engine lightcomes on to indicate thatthere is an OBD IIproblem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated by the system beforeany problem is apparent. This can prevent more seriousdamage to your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctly diagnosingany malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system ofyour vehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This couldalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3.

3-42

This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is notrunning. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.This light also comes on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission control system on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service might be required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following can prevent more serious damage to yourvehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restartthe engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If theLight Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailerfor service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou might be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installed shouldturn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.The condition is usually corrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few driving trips should turn thelight off.

3-43

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run as efficiently as designed. Youmight notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling whenyou put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — theseconditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.This will be detected by the system and cause the light toturn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Yourdealer/retailer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that might have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced the battery or if thebattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This can take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

3-44

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance maydamage the engine. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual for changing engine oil.

This light will come onbriefly when you start yourengine as a check to besure it works. If it does not,have your vehicleserviced.

If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is notflowing through your engine properly. You could be lowon oil and you might have some other system problem.

Change Engine Oil Light

If this light comes on, itmeans that service isrequired for your vehicle.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and EngineOil on page 5-18 for more information.

After having the oil changed you will need to reset thelight. See Engine Oil on page 5-18 for more information.

If this light is blinking, a chime will sound indicatinglow engine oil.

Security Light

For information regardingthis light and the vehicle’ssecurity system, seeContent Theft-Deterrent onpage 2-20.

3-45

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.See Cruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.

Reduced Engine Power Light

If the reduced enginepower light is on, a chimewill sound and anoticeable reduction in thevehicle’s performancemay occur.

If the reduced engine power light is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while the reduced engine power light ison, but acceleration and speed may be reduced.

Anytime the reduced engine power light stays on, thevehicle should be taken to an authorized GM dealer assoon as possible for service.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8for more information.

3-46

Headlamps Suggested Light

This light will come onwhen the use ofheadlamps is suggested.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when the ignition ison. If the light stays on,a chime will soundindicating your windshieldwasher fluid is low.

See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-44 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

When the ignition is on,this light will stay on untilall doors are closedand completely latched.

You will hear a chime if a door is unlatched after theengine is started and the vehicle is not in PARK (P).

Trunk Ajar Light

This light will come on anda chime will sound if thetrunk is ajar and thevehicle is not in PARK (P).

Try closing the trunk again. Never drive with thetrunk open.

3-47

Service Vehicle Soon Light

For vehicles with this light,it will come on if acondition exists that mayrequire the vehicle tobe taken in for service.

If the light comes on, see your dealer/retailer for serviceas soon as possible.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage indicatesabout how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank when theignition is on.

When the indicator nears empty, there is still a little fuelleft, but you should get more fuel soon.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.All these things are normal and do not indicate thatanything is wrong with the fuel gage:• At the gas station, the pump shuts off before the

gage reads full.

• It takes more, or less, fuel to fill up than the gagereads. For example, the gage reads half full, butit took more, or less, than half of the tank’s capacityto fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or accelerating.

• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignitionis turned off.

Low Fuel Warning LightYour vehicle may have a low fuel light. It is a circlelocated on the fuel gage and will come on and a chimewill sound periodically when the vehicle is low on fuel.The light will go off when fuel is added to the fuel tank.

It will also come on for a few seconds when the ignitionis turned on as a check to indicate it is working. If itdoes not come on then, have it fixed.

For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), aLOW FUEL message will appear. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-58 for more information.

3-48

Check Gas Cap Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come on if yourgas cap is not securelyfastened.

See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-42 for moreinformation.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle may have a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC display located inthe instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.The DIC buttons are located on the center of theinstrument panel, below the center outlets.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a shortdelay, the uplevel DIC will display the WELCOMEDRIVER (1 or 2) if a personalized key 1 or 2 is used,and then the information that was last displayed beforethe engine was turned off.

The base level DIC displays the odometer and tripodometers only.

The uplevel DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers,fuel economy, trip computer, vehicle system, andcompass display information. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem is detected. In addition,the uplevel DIC displays phone numbers that arecalled using the OnStar® system, if equipped. SeeOnStar® System on page 2-43.

The outside air temperature automatically appears inthe bottom right corner of the uplevel DIC display whenviewing the trip/odometer screens, fuel screens andsome of the gages screens. If the outside airtemperature is at or below 37°F (3°C), the temperaturereading will toggle between displaying the outsidetemperature and the word ICE for two minutes. If thereis a problem with the system that controls thetemperature display, the letters OC (open circuit) or SC(short circuit) will appear on the display. If this occurs,have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

The uplevel DIC also allows some features to becustomized or personalized. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-76 for more information.

3-49

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different modes which can be accessed bypressing the DIC buttons located on the center of theinstrument panel. Depending on whether your vehiclehas the base level or uplevel DIC, the buttons andmodes available will differ.

The base level buttons are the trip/odometer andEnglish/Metric buttons.

The uplevel buttons are the trip/odometer, fuel, gages,set/reset, and option buttons.

The button functions are detailed in the following pages.

DIC Buttons

TRIP/ODO (Trip/Odometer): For vehicles with thebase level DIC, press this button to display the odometerand trip distance.

For vehicles with the uplevel DIC, press this button todisplay the odometer, trip distance, time elapsed,and average speed.

E/M (English/Metric)**: For vehicles with the baselevel DIC, press this button to select between English orMetric units.

For vehicles with the uplevel DIC, to select betweenEnglish or Metric units, see “Units” later in this section.

. (Fuel)*: Press this button to display the fuelrange and average fuel economy.

Uplevel shown

3-50

2 (Gages)*: Press this button to display the batteryvoltage, oil life, and tire pressure readings.

r (Set/Reset)*: Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

4 (Option)*: Press this button to display the units,language, personalization, compass zone, and compasscalibration. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 3-76 and DIC Compass (Uplevel Only) onpage 3-56 for more information.

t (Traction Control): Press this button to turntraction control on or off. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-6 for more information.

Press and hold this button to turn StabiliTrak® off, forvehicles with this feature. Press this button again to turnboth traction control and StabiliTrak® on. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-8 for more information.

| (Hazard): Press this button to turn the hazardwarning flashers on and off. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 3-6 for more information.

*These buttons are only available on vehicles with theuplevel DIC.

**This button is only available on vehicles with the baselevel DIC.

Trip/Odometer Menu Items

TRIP/ODO (Trip Odometer): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

OdometerPress the trip/odometer button until the odometerdisplays. This mode shows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles or kilometers.

Trip A and Trip BPress the trip/odometer button until A or B displays.This mode shows the current distance traveled in eithermiles or kilometers since the last reset for each tripodometer. Both trip odometers can be used at thesame time.

The display will show the odometer on the top line andthe trip odometer information, either A or B, on thebottom line.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately bybriefly pressing the set/reset button on vehicles with theuplevel DIC or by briefly pressing and holding the tripodometer button on vehicles with the base levelDIC while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

3-51

There is also a retroactive trip odometer function thatperforms the following for each trip odometer:

• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph (5 km/h)during the current ignition cycle, this function willset the trip odometer to the distance drivenduring the current ignition cycle.

• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded3 mph (5 km/h), this function will set the tripodometer to the distance driven during the previousignition cycle plus the distance driven during thecurrent ignition cycle.

Press and hold the set/reset button on vehicles with theuplevel DIC or the trip/odometer button on vehicleswith the base level DIC for three seconds, then releasethe button. The retroactive trip odometer value willbe set into the currently displayed trip odometer.

Time Elapsed (Uplevel Only)Press the trip/odometer button until TIME ELAPSED :00displays. This mode is like a stopwatch, in that youcan clock the time it takes to get from one pointto another. Each of the fields for the hours, minutes,and seconds are two numeric digits.

Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press theset/reset button on vehicles with the uplevel DIC to startthe timing feature. Press the set/reset button again tostop it. If you will be starting and stopping your vehicle,during a trip for instance, the TIME ELAPSED featurewill automatically start timing where it left off whenyou last stopped. To reset it, press and hold theset/reset button for about 1.5 seconds. The display willreturn to zero. Press the trip/odometer button to exitfrom the TIME ELAPSED display.

Average Speed (Uplevel Only)Press the trip/odometer button until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This mode shows the average speed ofthe vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers perhour (km/h). This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speed recorded since the last resetof this value. To reset the value, press the trip/odometerbutton to display AVERAGE SPEED, then press andhold the set/reset button on vehicles with the uplevelDIC. The display will return to zero.

3-52

Fuel Menu Items (Uplevel Only)

. (Fuel): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

Fuel RangePress the fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. Thismode shows the approximate number of remainingmiles or kilometers the vehicle can be driven withoutrefueling.

Fuel range is based on several factors, includingdistance traveled, fuel used, fuel capacity, etc. Thisestimate will change if driving conditions change. Forexample, if driving in traffic and making frequentstops, this mode may read one number, but if the vehicleis driven on a freeway, the number may change eventhough the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. Thisis because different driving conditions producedifferent fuel economies. Generally, freeway drivingproduces better fuel economy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW willdisplay followed by the LOW FUEL message. See “LOWFUEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58 for more information.

Average Fuel EconomyPress the fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.This mode shows the approximate average miles pergallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Thisnumber is calculated based on the number of mpg(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu itemwas reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold theset/reset button. The display will return to zero.

Gages Menu Items (Uplevel Only)

2 (Gages): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

BatteryPress the gages button until BATTERY displays. Thismode shows the current battery voltage.

Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage basedon the state of the battery. The battery voltage mayfluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. Thisis normal.

If there is a problem with the battery charging system, aDIC message will display. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58 for more information.

See Electric Power Management on page 3-18 for moreinformation.

3-53

Oil LifePress the gages button until OIL LIFE displays. Thismode shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining usefullife. If you see OIL LIFE 99% on the display, that means99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil lifesystem will alert you to change your oil on a scheduleconsistent with your driving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE OILSOON message will appear on the display. You shouldchange your oil as soon as possible. See Engine Oilon page 5-18. In addition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 formore information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself aftereach oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has just been changed. Itcannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 5-21. The display will show 100%when the system is reset.

Tire PressurePress the gages button until FRONT TIRE PRESSUREdisplays. This mode shows the pressure for the fronttires. To view the pressure for the rear tires, press thegages button again until REAR TIRE PRESSUREdisplays. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).

If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the systemwhile driving, a message advising you to check thepressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-58 for moreinformation.

If the tire pressure display shows dashes or blanksinstead of a value, there may be a problem with yourvehicle. If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer/retailer for service.

3-54

Option Menu Items (Uplevel Only)

4 (Option): Press this button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

UnitsPress the option button until UNITS displays. This modeallows you to select between English or Metric unitsof measurement. Once in this mode, press the set/resetbutton to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units.

LanguagePress the option button until the language screendisplays. This mode allows you to select the languagein which the DIC messages will appear. Once inthis mode, press the set/reset button to select amongthe following choices:

• English

• Francais (French)

• Espanol (Spanish)

PersonalizationPress the option button until PERSONAL PROGRAMdisplays. Your vehicle may have personalizationcapabilities that allow you to program certain features toa preferred setting for up to two drivers.

Your vehicle may also have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features to onepreferred setting. Customization features can only beprogrammed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot beprogrammed to a preferred setting for up to twodrivers. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76for additional information on personal programming.

Compass ZoneTo change the compass zone through the DIC, see DICCompass (Uplevel Only) on page 3-56.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. To calibratethe compass through the DIC, see DIC Compass(Uplevel Only) on page 3-56.

3-55

DIC Compass (Uplevel Only)Your vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Compass ZoneThe zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances, such as during a longdistance cross-country trip or moving to a new state orprovince, it will be necessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting the zone through theDIC if the zone is not set correctly.

Compass variance is the difference between the earth’smagnetic north and true geographic north. If the compassis not set to the zone where you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compass must be set to thevariance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is

moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P).Press the option button until COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variancezone number on the map.Zones 1 through 15 are available.

3-56

3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through andselect the appropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip or fuel button until the vehicleheading, for example, N for North, is displayedin the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.

Compass CalibrationThe compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibratethe compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle incircles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrateaway from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, orother industrial structures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, thecompass should be calibrated.

If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,N for North, or the heading does not change aftermaking turns, there may be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antennamount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note padholder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off thevehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on thevehicle and calibrate the compass.

To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the

compass zone is set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located. See “CompassVariance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.Do not operate any switches such as window,sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. duringthe calibration procedure.

2. Press the option button until COMPASSCALIBRATION displays.

3. Press the set/reset button to start the compasscalibration.

4. The DIC will display CALIBRATION BEGUN DRIVEIN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles atless than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.The DIC will display CALIBRATION FINISHEDfor a few seconds when the calibration is complete.The DIC display will then return to COMPASSCALIBRATION.

3-57

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the uplevel DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changed andthat some action may be needed by the driver to correctthe condition. Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not require immediate action, butyou can press any of the uplevel DIC buttons toacknowledge that you received the message and clear itfrom the DIC display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can be cleared.

If there are any active warning messages when thevehicle is turned off, two chimes sound and theDIC goes into a reminder mode. The reminder modedisplays any active message. If there are multiplemessages, the DIC displays each message for fiveseconds. After each active message is displayed once,the reminder mode turns off.

You should take any messages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember that clearing themessages will only make the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem.

The following are the possible messages that can bedisplayed and some information about them.

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTIONThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-40.To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressor is automatically turned off.When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

This message comes on while the ignition is in ON/RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thiswarning message and to clear it from the screen.

This message continues to display for two seconds if ithas not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but the condition stillexists when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on. If this message continuesto appear, have the system repaired by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage tothe engine.

3-58

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detects thatthe battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonablelevel. The battery saver system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.At the point that the features are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying tosave the charge in the battery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the batteryto recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.If your vehicle has an uplevel DIC, you can monitorthe battery voltage by pressing the gages button untilBATTERY displays.

CHANGE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is required for thevehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil onpage 5-18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 formore information.

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset byacknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screenunder the gages menu on the DIC must also be reset.See “Oil Life” under DIC Operation and Displays onpage 3-50 and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21.

This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.


If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

CHARGING SYSTEM FAILUREThis message displays when there is a problem with thegenerator and battery charging systems. Driving withthis problem could drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicleas soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electricalsystem checked by your dealer/retailer immediately.

This message displays and a chime sounds while theignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.

3-59

This message continues to display for two seconds if ithas not been acknowledged when the engine isturned off. It also re-displays for two seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but the condition stillexists when the engine is turned off.If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message may display if the fuel cap is not on, or isnot fully tightened. The check gas cap light also appearson the instrument panel cluster. See Check Gas CapLight on page 3-49. Check the fuel cap to ensure that it ison properly. The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A looseor missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properlyinstalled should turn this message off. See Filling theTank on page 5-8 for more information.




CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the pressure in one ormore of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate whichtire needs to be checked. You can receive more thanone tire pressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tireson page 5-63, Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21,and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70. The DIC alsoshows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-50. If the tire pressure is low,the low tire pressure warning light comes on. SeeTire Pressure Light on page 3-41.

3-60




DELAYED LOCKINGThis message displays to inform the driver that eventhough a door lock switch or the lock button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter has beenpressed, that actual locking of the doors is beingdelayed because the delayed locking feature has beenactivated in the DIC. See “DELAYED LOCKING”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-76 formore information.

This message appears and a chime sounds when theignition is off.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

DRIVER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver door is not closedproperly. Make sure that the door is closed completely.

This message displays while the ignition is in ON/RUN.A chime sounds when the gear position is shifted out ofPARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



3-61

DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the driver side rear door isnot closed properly. Make sure that the door is closedcompletely.




ENGINE COOLANT HOT

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine isoverheating, severe engine damage may occur. Ifan overheat warning appears on the instrumentpanel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-30 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperaturewarning light also appears on the instrument panelcluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 3-40 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 3-40 for more information.

To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the airconditioner if it is on. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the air conditioner can be turnedback on.

This message displays only when the ignition is inON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed. Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



3-62

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays when the amount of availablelight outside of the vehicle is low, or the windshieldwipers have been on for about 30 seconds, andthe exterior lamps control is off or in the parking lampsposition. This message informs the driver that turningon the exterior lamps is recommended. See ExteriorLamps on page 3-13 for more information.




HOOD AJARIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when the hood is not closed properly.Make sure that the hood is closed completely. SeeHood Release on page 5-11.




HOT TRANS (Transmission) FLUIDThis message displays when the transmission fluid inyour vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allowit to idle until it cools down. If the warning messagecontinues to display, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

This message displays and a chime sounds only whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clear itfrom the screen.



3-63

KEY FOB BATTERY LOWThis message displays when the battery in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced.To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-5.




KEY IN IGNITIONThis message displays and a chime sounds continuouslywhen the driver’s door is open and the key is inACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.


This message disappears and the chiming stops whenthe key is removed from the ignition.

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left front turn signalbulb needs to be replaced.




LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left rear turn signalbulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps onpage 5-59.


3-64



LOW BRAKE FLUIDThis message displays when the brake fluid level is low.Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retaileras soon as possible. See Brakes on page 5-46 forproper fluid level.

The brake system warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster when this message appears onthe DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.

This message displays and a chime sounds only whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



LOW FUELThis message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See FuelGage on page 3-48 and Filling the Tank on page 5-8 formore information.

The message displays and a chime sounds while theignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttonsto acknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.


3-65

LOW OIL PRESSURE

Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warningmessage appears on the DIC display, stop thevehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle untilthe cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.Severe engine damage can result from driving avehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oilon page 5-18 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oilpressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Lighton page 3-45.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage canresult from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soonas possible when this message is displayed.

This message displays only when the ignition is inON/RUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed.

This message cannot be acknowledged and clearedfrom the screen. This message re-displays for afew seconds if the condition still exists when the engineis turned off.


LOW WASHER FLUIDThis message displays when the windshield washerfluid is low. Fill the windshield washer reservoir as soonas possible. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of the windshield washerreservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-44 for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds only whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clear itfrom the screen.



3-66

PARKING BRAKE ONThis message displays to alert the driver when thevehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in ON/RUN,and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).Release the parking brake before driving. See ParkingBrake on page 2-32 for more information.

The brake system warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster when this message appears onthe DIC. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-37.

A chime sounds continuously while this message isdisplayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press any ofthe DIC buttons to acknowledge this message andto clear it from the screen.



PARK LAMPS ONThis message displays to alert the driver when theheadlamps or parking lamps are on while the ignition isoff and the driver’s door is opened. See ExteriorLamps on page 3-13 for more information. A chimesounds continuously while this message is displayed.

Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.

PASSENGER’S DOOR AJARThis message displays when the front passenger dooris not closed properly. Make sure that the door is closedcompletely.




3-67

PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJARThis message displays when the passenger side reardoor is not closed properly. Make sure that the dooris closed completely.




REDUCED ENGINE POWERThis message displays when the vehicle’s engine poweris reduced. Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, butthere is no reduction in performance, proceed toyour destination. The performance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may bedriven at a reduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicle should be taken toyour dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.




REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFEThis message displays when your vehicle is in anoverheated engine operating mode. This operating modeallows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency. In this mode, you will notice a significantloss in power and engine performance. See OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-32 formore information. Anytime this message is on, thevehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for serviceas soon as possible.


3-68



REMOTE START DISABLEDIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays if a remote start attempt isunsuccessful. This may be caused if any of the followingconditions are true when a remote start attempt ismade:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The key is in the ignition.

• The hood or the doors are not closed.

• There is an emission control system malfunction.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.

• The maximum number of remote starts or remotestart attempts between ignition cycles has beenreached.

• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on whileattempting to remote start the vehicle.

See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 3-76 and Remote Vehicle Starton page 2-8 for more information.

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right front turn signalbulb needs to be replaced.




3-69

RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the right rear turn signalbulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps onpage 5-59.




SERVICE ABS SYSTEMThis message displays when the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) is not functioning properly. Have thebrake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soonas possible.

The antilock brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Antilock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-38.

This message only displays while the ignition is inON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays when a problem with the brakesystem has been detected. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.

The brake system warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster when this message appears onthe DIC. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.


3-70



SERVICE PARK LAMPSThis message displays when there is a problem with thepark lamps. Check to see if the park lamp fuse isblown and replace the fuse if necessary. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 5-109 and Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 5-110 for more information. Ifchanging the fuse does not correct the problem, seeyour dealer/retailer.




SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEMIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displays ifthere has been a problem detected with StabiliTrak®.A warning light also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light on page 3-38. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-8 for more information.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pull offthe road as soon as possible and stop carefully.Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off andthen back on. If this message still stays on or turns backon again while you are driving, your vehicle needsservice. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

This message displays only while the ignition is inON/RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.



3-71

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problem with thetheft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A faulthas been detected in the system which means thatthe system is disabled and it is not protecting thevehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you maywant to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer beforeturning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III Operation onpage 2-22 for more information.

This message displays and a chime sounds only whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Press any of the DICbuttons to acknowledge this message and to clear itfrom the screen.



SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tirepressure light also flashes and then remains on duringthe same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light onpage 3-41. Several conditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 5-73 for more information. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.See your dealer/retailer.




3-72

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEMThis message displays when the traction system is notfunctioning properly. A warning light also appearson the instrument panel cluster. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-38. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 4-6 or EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 4-7 for moreinformation. Have the system serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.




SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORTSTEERINGIf your vehicle has variable effort steering, this messagedisplays when if this system is not functioning properly.See Steering on page 4-9 for more information.Have the system serviced by your dealer/retailer assoon as possible.




3-73

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissions relatedmalfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer/retailer as soon as possible.




STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVEIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displayswhen StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you withdirectional control of the vehicle. Slippery roadconditions may exist when this message is displayed,so adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-8.

This message displays only while the ignition is inON/RUN. This message stays on until road conditionschange and StabiliTrak® is not active.

This message cannot be acknowledged and clearedfrom the screen.

STABILITY CONTROL OFFIf your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message displaysany time the system turns off. When this messagehas been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer availableto assist you with directional control of the vehicle.Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 4-8.

This message displays only while the ignition is inON/RUN.

Any of the following conditions may cause theStabiliTrak® system to turn off:

• The system is turned off by pressing and holdingthe traction control button for five seconds. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.

• The battery is low.

• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

3-74

STARTING DISABLEDThis message displays if the starting of the engine isdisabled due to the electronic throttle control system orvehicle theft-deterrent system. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer immediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inON/RUN and will not disappear until the problem isresolved.


TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVEThis message displays when the traction system is on.Slippery road conditions may exist if this message isdisplayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 or EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 4-7 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inON/RUN and will not disappear until driving conditionschange and the system is no longer active.

This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared fromthe screen.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the traction system turnsoff. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7for more information.

This message only displays while the ignition is inON/RUN and disappears after two seconds.

Any of the following conditions may cause the system toturn off:

• The system is turned off by pressing the tractioncontrol button located on the center of the instrumentpanel. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 4-7.

• The battery is low.

• There is a system failure. See your dealer/retailer forservice.

3-75

TRUNK AJARThis message displays when the trunk is not closedcompletely. Make sure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk on page 2-14.




TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn off the turnsignal if you drive your vehicle for more than about0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

This message displays and a chime sounds only whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN. This message clears fromthe DIC if the turn signal is manually turned off, a turn iscompleted, or the message is acknowledged.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to one preferredsetting. Customization features can only be programmedto one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmedto a preferred setting for two different drivers. Thecustomization features include the following:

• Exterior lighting delay

• Interior lighting delay

• Delayed locking

• Content theft

• Remote keyless entry feedback

• Remote start

Your vehicle may also have personalization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features to apreferred setting for up to two drivers. The firstpersonalized key corresponds to driver 1 and the secondpersonalized key corresponds to driver 2. Thepersonalization features include the following:

• Radio station presets

• Auto door unlock preferences

• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences

3-76

All of the customization and personalization options maynot be available on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the customization andpersonalization features were set when your vehicle leftthe factory, but may have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

The driver’s personalization preferences are recalled byusing the key programmed for driver 1 or 2.

To change customization and personalizationpreferences, use the following procedure:

Entering the Personal Program Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the option button until PERSONALPROGRAM displays.If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONALPROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.If the vehicle is not able to enter the personalprogram menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM NOTAVAILABLE will display.

3. Press the set/reset button to begin.

4. The DIC will then display an instruction screen.Press the option button to display the featuresthat are available to program.Press the set/reset button to change the setting ofeach feature.

Customization Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allow youto program settings to the vehicle:

FACTORY DEFAULTSThis feature allows you to set all of the customizationand personalization features back to their factory defaultsettings.

Press the option button until FACTORY DEFAULTSappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto scroll through the following settings:

NO (default): The customization and personalizationfeatures will not be set to their factory default settings.

YES: The customization and personalization featureswill be set to their factory default settings.

To select a setting and move on to the next feature,press the option button while the desired settingis displayed on the DIC.

3-77

ALL KEYS WILL BE RESETThis screen will only display if YES was selected on theFACTORY DEFAULTS screen.

Press the set/reset button to scroll through the followingsettings:

CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to theirfactory default settings and the DIC will return to thePERSONAL PROGRAM menu.

OK: The features will be set to their factory defaultsettings, the DIC will exit the personal program menu,and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will display.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAYThis feature allows you to set the amount of time theexterior lamps remain on after the key is removed fromthe ignition or the vehicle is unlocked using theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the option button until EXT LIGHT DELAYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for15 seconds.

30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay onfor 30 seconds.




INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVEDThis feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle toturn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Press the option button until INT LIGHTS KEYSREMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will notcause the interior lamps to turn on.

ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition willcause the interior lamps to be turned on for about25 seconds.


3-78

DELAYED LOCKINGThis feature allows the locking of the vehicle to bedelayed until all of the doors have been closed for aboutfive seconds.

When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it may beactivated when the key is out of the ignition by doingone of the following:

• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switch onetime while the driver’s door is open.

• Pressing the passenger’s door power lock switchone time while the passenger’s door is open.

• Pressing the lock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter one time while any dooris open.

Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking isactive.

The doors may be locked immediately by repeating oneof the above actions more than one time.

If a door remains open, without any other door beingopened or closed, the vehicle will lock after about45 seconds.

If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock thedoors. See Delayed Locking on page 2-12 for moreinformation.

Press the option button until DELAYED LOCKINGappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking of thevehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will bedelayed by five seconds while a door is open after apower door lock switch is pressed, or the lock button onthe RKE transmitter is pressed while a door is open.


3-79

CONTENT THEFTIf your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,once this feature is turned on, the system will activateif someone tries to enter the vehicle without usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or thecorrect key.

Press the option button until CONTENT THEFT appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will beturned off.

ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system will beturned on.

When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent systemwill be armed when the vehicle is locked by pressingthe lock button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing thepower door lock switch. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-20 and Power Door Locks on page 2-11 formore information.


FOB LOCK FEEDBACKThis feature allows you to select the type of feedbackyou will receive when locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the option button until FOB LOCK FEEDBACKappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when locking thevehicle.

LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock buttonis pressed again within five seconds of the previouscommand.


3-80

REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows theremote start to be turned off or on. The remote startfeature allows you to start the engine from outside of thevehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-8 formore information.

Press the option button until REMOTE START appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.


Personalization Menu ItemsThe following are personalization features that allow youto program setting for up to two drivers:

PERSONALIZE KEYThis feature allows you to personalize a key to berecognized as key 1 or 2. A personalized key allows youto program personalization features to a preferredsetting to correspond to key 1 or 2. If you are using akey that has already been personalized, this screen willnot display.

Press the option button until PERSONALIZE KEYappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto scroll through the following settings:

NO (default): The key will not be personalized.

YES: The key will be personalized.


3-81

REPLACE KEYThis screen displays only if YES was selected forthe PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2 havealready been personalized, and the current key beingused is not key 1 or 2. This feature allows you to programa key to be recognized as key 1 or 2 in the event that thepreviously programmed key needs to be replaced.

1: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 1.

2: The key will be programmed to be recognizedas key 2.

CANCEL (default): The key will not be programmed.

RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZEDThis screen displays only if YES was selected for thePERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature allows you toset the radio station presets to be recognized for thekey, 1 or 2, that is being used. You may notice a changeto the radio after this message displays. After thismessage displays, any change to the presets will berecognized for key 1 or 2 and will be maintained bythe radio.

AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows automatic door unlocking to beturned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for all ofthe doors.

Press the option button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out ofthe ignition.

ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken outof the ignition.


3-82

AUTO UNLOCK ONThis feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL wasselected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature. Thisfeature allows the selection of when the vehicle’s doorswill unlock.

Press the option button until AUTO UNLOCK ONappears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset buttonto scroll through the following settings:

KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key istaken out of the ignition.

PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into PARK (P).


FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESSThis feature allows the selection of which doors willunlock on the first press of the unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 2-5 for more information.

Press the option button until FOB UNLOCK ON 1STPRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to scroll through the following settings:

DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlock on thefirst press of the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.

ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press of theunlock button on the RKE transmitter.

To select a setting, press the option button while thedesired setting is displayed on the DIC. The DICwill then display PRESS UNLOCK SWITCH ON KEYFOB. Press the unlock button on the RKE transmitterand the setting will be saved for that RKE transmitter.

After programming the last option, the messagePERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED appears on the DICdisplay for a few seconds, then the display returns to thePERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.

Exiting the Personal Program MenuThe personal program menu will be exited when any ofthe following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.

• The end of the personal program menu is reached.

3-83

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and then readthe pages following to familiarize yourself with itsfeatures.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash and youor others can be injured or killed. Always keepyour eyes on the road and your mind on thedrive — avoid engaging in extended searchingwhile driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safedriving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Hereare some ways in which you can help avoid distractionwhile driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steering wheelcontrols if the vehicle has them.

3-84

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, makesure that it can be added by checking with yourdealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules coveringmobile radio and telephone units. If soundequipment can be added, it is very important to doit properly. Added sound equipment may interferewith the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with the operationof sound equipment that has been added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,parking brake, and other functions of your vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system.If that equipment is replaced or additional equipmentis added to your vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

Your vehicle may have a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio systemcan be played even after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25 formore information.

Setting the ClockPress and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PMdisplays. Press and hold M until the correct minutedisplays. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

3-85

Radio(s)

Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audiosystem.

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with CD similar

Radio with Six-Disc CD

3-86

Playing the Radio

P (Power): Press to turn the system on and off.

v (Volume): Turn to increase or to decrease thevolume.

DISP (Display): Press to switch the display betweenthe radio station frequency and time of day. Whilethe ignition is off, press this button to display the time.

If your vehicle’s radio has XM™ (if equipped), pressthe DISP button while in XM™ mode to retrievefour different categories of information related to thecurrent song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category orPTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the DISPbutton until the desired display appears, then holdthis button for two seconds. The radio beeps once andthe selected display becomes the default.

SCV (Speed Compensated Volume): If your vehicle’sradio has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV), theaudio system adjusts automatically to make up for roadand wind noise while driving.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Depending on theradio, the selection may be SPEED VOL MIN (volumeminimum), SPEED VOL MED (volume medium), orSPEED VOL MAX (volume maximum). Each highersetting allows for more volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds. Then while driving, SCV increasesthe volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at anyspeed. The volume level should always sound the sameto you as you drive. NONE displays if the radio cannotdetermine the vehicle speed. To turn SCV off, press thisbutton until OFF or SPEED VOL OFF displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, orXM1™ or XM2™ (if equipped).

e (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.

o SEEK p: Press and release the arrows to go tothe previous or the next station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for morethan two seconds. SCAN or SCN displays and theradio beeps once. The radio goes to a station, plays fora few seconds, and then goes to the next station.Press either arrow again or one of the pushbuttons tostop scanning presets.

3-87

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow formore than four seconds. PSCAN or PSC displaysand the radio beeps twice. The radio goes to a presetstation, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext preset station. Press either arrow again or one ofthe pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

SCAN: Press until SC displays. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds, and then goes tothe next station. Press again to stop scanning stations.

The radio scans stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

INFO (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceOnly): Your vehicle’s radio may have an INFO button.If the current station on the radio has a message,the information symbol displays. Press to see themessage. If the entire message is not displayed, partsof the message appears every three seconds. Tomanually scroll through the message, press and releasethe INFO button.

When a message is not available from a station, NOINFO displays.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six AM, six XM1™and six XM2™ (if equipped)) can be programmed onthe six numbered pushbuttons.

To program either radio:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1™ orXM2™ (if equipped).

3. Tune to the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until the radio beeps once. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed again, thestation and equalization that were stored, returns.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

e (Bass/Treble): Press and release until BASS orTREBLE displays. Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the bass or treble.

Press and hold to adjust the bass and treble to themiddle position. The radio beeps once.

3-88

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold when no tone or speaker controldisplays. ALL CENTERED displays and the radiobeeps once.

EQ (Equalization): Press to select customizedequalization settings.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,press and release until BASS or TREBLE displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance betweenthe right and the left speakers, press and release untilBAL (balance) displays. Turn this knob to move thesound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release until FAD (fade) displays.Turn this knob to move the sound toward the frontor the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle position,press, then press and hold until the radio beeps once.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold when no tone or speaker controldisplays. ALL CENTERED displays and the radiobeeps once.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)To select and find a desired category, performthe following:

1. Press the CAT button to enter the category selectmode. The current category displays.

2. Turn the e knob to select a category.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow to go to the category’s first station.

4. Press either SEEK arrow again to go to anotherstation within that category. The category willdisplay. If CAT times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

5. Press CAT to exit the category select mode or waitfor CAT to time out.

If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOTFOUND displays and the radio returns to the last stationyou were listening to.

3-89

Scanning Categories (CAT) (XM™Satellite Radio Service Only)To scan a desired category by doing the following:

1. Press the CAT button to enter the category selectmode. The current category displays.

2. Turn the e knob to select a category.

3. Press either SEEK arrow for two seconds once thedesired category is displayed, to scan the stationsin that category.

4. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

If the radio cannot find the desired category, NOTFOUND displays and the radio returns to the last stationyou were listening to.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated foryour vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE displays,it means that the radio has not been configured properlyfor your vehicle and it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: If LOCKED displays, it means theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take your vehicleto your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. During your trial or when yousubscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ RadioOnline for when you are not in your vehicle. A service feeis required to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 3-100 later in thissection for further detail.

3-90

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD begins playing. To insert aCD while the ignition is off, first press the Z buttonor the DISP knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in theplayer, it stays in the player. While the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. Aseach new track starts to play, the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

Care of Your CDsIf playing a CD, the sound quality can be reduced dueto CD quality, the method of recording, the quality of themusic that has been recorded, and the way the CDhas been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD(s)in their original cases or other protective cases andaway from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scansthe bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, theCD does not play properly or not at all.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs bygrasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole andthe outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure thewiping process starts from the center to the edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerDo not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in theCD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computerand a description label is needed, try labeling the top ofthe recorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than oneCD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attemptis made to play scratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged. While using the CDplayer, use only CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.

3-91

For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CDplayer, see the following:

LOAD: Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CDplayer holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.The radio beeps once and the indicator light,located to the right of the slot, begins to flash andMULTI LOAD # displays.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert theCD partway into the slot, label side up. The playerpulls the CD in.

Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light beginsflashing again. Once the light stops flashing and turnsgreen, another CD can be loaded. The CD player takesup to six CDs.

To load more than one CD but less than six, completeSteps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a number foreach CD displays.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number displays. To play aspecific CD, press the numbered pushbutton thatcorresponds to the CD. A small bar appears under theCD number that is playing and the track number displays.

Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press andrelease.

3-92

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold this button for two seconds.The radio beeps once and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, begins to flash and EJECTALL displays.

2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #displays. The CD ejects and can be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator light beginsflashing again and another CD ejects.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or theZ button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD isautomatically pulled back into the player. If a CD ispushed back into the player, before the 25 second timeperiod is complete, the player senses an error andtries to eject the CD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the Z button to eject a CDafter trying to push it in manually. The player’s25-second eject timer resets at each press of the ejectbutton, causing the player to not eject the CD untilthe 25-second time period has elapsed.

1 s (Reverse): Press to reverse within thecurrent track.

2 \ (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward within thecurrent track.

3 N (Repeat): Depending on the radio, press to heara track over again. REPEAT TRACK displays. Thecurrent track continues to repeat.

For the radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press to repeatone track or an entire CD.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat playing a track, press and release thisbutton. RPT # displays. Press this button againto turn off repeat play.

• To repeat playing a CD, press and hold this buttonfor two seconds. REPEAT CD # displays. Pressthis button again to turn off repeat play.

3-93

4 RDM (Random): Depending on the radio, pressto hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RANDOM ON displays. Press again to turnoff random play.

For the radio with a Six-Disc CD player, press to listen tothe tracks in random, on one CD or on all of the CDs.

To use random on a Six-Disc CD player, do one of thefollowing:

• To play the tracks on a CD in random order, pressand release the random button. RANDOM ONEdisplays. Press again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loadedin random order, press and hold this button formore than two seconds. A beep sounds andRANDOM ALL displays. Press again to turn offrandom play.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current or the previous track. Press the rightarrow to go to the start of the next track.

To scan tracks, press and hold either arrow for more thantwo seconds. SCAN displays. The radio goes to the nexttrack, plays 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.

To scan one CD on a Six-Disc CD player, press and holdeither SEEK arrow for more than two seconds untilTRACK SCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radiogoes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds, then goes tothe next track.

Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow formore than four seconds until ALL CD SCAN displays anda beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD.

Press either arrow again, to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press to see how long the currenttrack has been playing. The elapsed time of the trackdisplays. To change the default on the display, track, orelapsed time, press until the desired display appears,then hold the button for two seconds. The radioproduces one beep and the selected display becomesthe default.

3-94

BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD isplaying. The inactive CD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD: Press to play a CD while listening to the radio. TheCD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.

EQ (Equalization): Press to select an equalizationsetting while playing a CD. The equalization is set whilea CD is played. See “EQ” listed previously for moreinformation. If an EQ setting is selected for a CD, it isactivated each time a CD is played.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject is activatedwhile either the ignition or radio is off. CDs can beloaded while the ignition and radio is off if this button ispressed first.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio may have the MP3 CD-R disccapability feature. For more information, see Using anMP3 on page 3-97 later in this section.

Using List ModeThe Six-Disc CD player has a feature called song list.This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least oneCD. See “LOAD” listed previously in this section formore information.

2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song listmode. LIST should not display. If LIST is displayed,press the LIST button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numberedpushbutton and then use the p arrow to locatethe track to be saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the LIST button to save the trackinto memory. When LIST is pressed, one beepsounds immediately. After two seconds ofcontinuously pressing the LIST button, TRACKADD displays and two beeps sound to confirm thetrack has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

S-LIST FULL displays if more than 20 selectionsare saved.

3-95

To play the song list, press the LIST button. One beepsounds and S-LIST displays. The recorded tracksbegins to play in the order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.Seeking past the last saved track returns to the firstsaved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on. LISTdisplays.

3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desired trackto be deleted.

4. Press and hold the LIST button for two seconds.When LIST is pressed, one beep soundsimmediately. After two seconds of continuouslypressing the LIST button, TRACK DELETE displaysand the radio beeps twice to confirm that thetrack has been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks aremoved up the list. When another track is added tothe song list, the track is added to the end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the LIST button to turn song list on. LISTdisplays.

3. Press and hold the LIST button for more thanfour seconds. The radio beeps once, followedby two beeps after two seconds, and a final beepsounds after four seconds. LIST EMPTY displaysindicating the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains savedtracks from that CD, those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the songlist again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the LIST button. The radiobeeps once and LIST is removed from the display.

3-96

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CDcomes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.Depending on the radio, see “MP3 Format”later in this section.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and albumwill be available for display by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to findsongs while driving. Organize songs by albumsusing one folder for each album. Each folderor album should contain 18 songs or less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better toburn the disc all at once.

3-97

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Longfile names, folder names, or playlist names could usemore disc memory space than necessary. To conservedisc space, keep the length of the file, folder, orplaylist name brief. MP3 CDs do not require file folders.The system can support up to 11 folders in depth.The depth of the folders should be kept down to make iteasier while locating a folder during playback. Allitems over the maximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directorydisplays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly underthe root directory are accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) always areaccessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in thefile structure that contains only folders/subfolders and nocompressed files directly beneath them, the playeradvances to the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audio files and the emptyfolder does not display.

No FolderIf a CD has no folder, only compressed files or playlistsare located under the root folder. The next andprevious folder functions have no function on a CD thatis recorded without folders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the first playlistand continues sequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the last track of the last playlisthas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then playbegins from the first track under the root directory.When all tracks from the root directory haveplayed, play continues from files according to theirnumerical listing. After playing the last trackfrom the last folder, play begins again at the firsttrack of the first folder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display does notautomatically show the new folder name unlessthe folder mode is chosen as the default display. See“DISP” later in this section for more information.The new track name displays.

3-98

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name that iscontained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not presentin the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file namewithout the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or four pagesare shortened. The display does not show parts of wordson the last page of text, and the extension of thefilename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists which were created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ softwarecan be accessed, however, there is no editingcapability. These playlists are treated as special folderscontaining compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in, and READING DISC displays. The CDshould begin playing and the CD symbol displays.See “Playing a CD” earlier in this section.

3 N (Repeat): Repeat lets one track, the entirefolder, or playlist be repeated.

Press and release this button until REPEAT TRACK,REPEAT FOLDER, or REPEAT P-LIST displays.The current track, folder or playlist continues to repeat.Press and release this button until REPEAT OFFdisplays to turn off repeated play.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear tracksin random, rather than sequential order. The entirefolder, playlist, or CD can be played in random order.

Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOMFOLDER, RANDOM P-LIST (playlist), or RANDOMDISC displays. Once all of the tracks in the current folderor playlist have played, the system moves on to thenext folder or playlist, and plays all of the tracksin random order.

While in random, pressing and releasing o or pSEEK arrow takes you to the previous or to the nextrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton until RANDOM OFFdisplays, to turn off random play.

3-99

5 ! (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to thefirst track in the previous folder. Press this buttonwhile in random folder mode to go to the previous folderand randomly play the tracks in that folder.

6 # (Next Folder): Press this button to go to thefirst track in the next folder. Press this button while inrandom folder mode to go to the next folder andrandomly play the tracks in that folder.

DISP (Display): Press this button to chance betweentrack mode, folder/playlist mode, and ID3 tag. The displayshows only eight characters, but there can be up to fourpages of text. If there are more than eight characters inthe song, folder, or playlist name, pressing this knobwithin two seconds goes to the next page of text. If thereare no other pages to be shown, pressing this buttonwithin two seconds goes to the next display mode.

• Song name and time of day mode displays thecurrent song name and time of day.

• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder orplaylist number the track number and the elapsedtime of the track.

• Song name and track number mode displays thecurrent song name and track number.

• ID3 Tag and folder mode displays the ID3 taginformation and the folder number.

• Song and folder mode displays the number of songsin the folder and the folder number.

INFO (Information): INFO displays when a currenttrack has ID3 tag information. Press this button todisplay the artist name and album contained in the tag.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena CD is playing. The inactive CD remains insidethe radio for future listening.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, orany others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is beingupdated, and no action is required.

3-100

No Signal: The vehicle is in a location that is blockingthe XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into anopen area, the signal should return.

Loading XM: The radio is processing audio and textdata received. No action is needed. This messageshould disappear shortly.

CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.

CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel isno longer assigned. Tune to another station. If thisstation was one of the presets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

No Info: No artist, song title, category, or textinformation is available at this time on this channel. Thesystem is working properly.

Not Found: There are no channels available for theselected category. The system is working properly.

XM Locked: The XM™ receiver may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes,XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles.If this message is received after having your vehicleserviced, check with your dealer/retailer.

Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message willalternate with the XM™ Radio eight-digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate the service.

Unknown: If this message is received when tuned tochannel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consultwith your dealer/retailer.

Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within ashort period of time, the receiver may have a fault.Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature works automaticallyby learning a portion of the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). If the radio is moved to a differentvehicle, it does not operate and LOC, LOCK, orLOCKED could display.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does notoperate if stolen.

3-101

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted atthe steering wheel. Theyinclude the following:

xw (Seek): Press the seek arrows to go to the next orto the previous radio station. The radio seeks stationsonly with a strong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to astation, play for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either seek arrow again to stop scanning.

While a CD is playing, press the seek arrows to go to thenext or previous track.

> (Mute/OnStar ®): Press this button to silence thesystem. Press this button again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this buttonfor more than two seconds to interact with theOnStar® system. See the OnStar® System on page 2-43in this manual for more information.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1™ or XM2™ (if equipped).

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to playstations that are programmed on the radio presetpushbuttons. The radio seeks preset stations only with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, pressthis button to go to the next available CD, if multipleCDs are loaded.

+ x / − x (Volume): Press the plus or minus volumebutton to increase or to decrease the volume.

3-102

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normal radioreception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers,vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessory poweroutlet. If there is interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations boost thepower levels during the day, and then reduce theselevels during the night. Static can also occur when thingslike storms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing the treble onyour radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reachonly about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals, causing the soundto fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fade in and out. Inaddition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™signal for a period of time. The radio may display NOSIGNAL to indicate interference.

3-103

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear windowdefogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that theinside surface of the rear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the insidesurface is damaged, it could interfere with radioreception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antennaconnector at the top-center of the rear window needs tobe properly attached to the post on the glass.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window may damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rear window defogger.Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Donot clear the inside rear window with sharpobjects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting withmetallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Because this antenna is built into the rear window, thereis a reduced risk of damage caused by car washesand vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rear windowdefogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger gridline has been damaged and the grid line must berepaired.

If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, and theantenna needs to be attached to the glass, makesure that you do not damage the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna. There is enough space between thelines to attach a cellular telephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

3-104

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roofof your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of theXM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interferewith the performance of the XM™ system. Make surethe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.To change the volume level of the chime, press and holdpushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio poweroff. The volume level will change from the normallevel to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.To change back to the default or normal setting,press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume levelwill change from the loud level to normal, and NORMALwill appear on the radio display. Removing the radioand not replacing it with a factory radio or chime modulewill disable vehicle chimes.

3-105

✍ NOTES

3-106

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3Braking .........................................................4-3Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-7StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-8Steering ........................................................4-9Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11Passing .......................................................4-11Loss of Control .............................................4-12

Driving at Night ............................................4-13Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-15Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16Winter Driving ..............................................4-17If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,

or Snow ...................................................4-20Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-21Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-21

Towing ..........................................................4-27Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-27Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-27Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-28

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-9.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance betweenyou and the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisionsresulting in injury or possible death. Thesesimple defensive driving techniques couldsave your life.

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver whohas been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driver who willnot drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

4-2

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control your vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. Attimes, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to askmore of those control systems than the tires androad can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of yourvehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 4-7, and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectyour vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-37.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bringup your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

4-3

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavementor gravel; the condition of the road, whether it iswet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. The brakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pacewith the traffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,the pedal could get harder to push down. If theengine stops, you will still have some power brakeassist. But you will use it when you brake. Once thepower assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.


Antilock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to drive away,ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentarymotor or clicking noise while this test is going on, andyou might even notice that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

4-4

If there is a problem withABS, this warning light willstay on. See AntilockBrake System WarningLight on page 3-38.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than anydriver could. The computer is programmed to make themost of available tire and road conditions. This canhelp you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time you need toget your foot up to the brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too close to the vehiclein front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakesif that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leaveenough room up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work for you. You might hearthe antilock pump or motor operate, and feel thebrake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.In many emergencies, steering can help you more thaneven the very best braking.

4-5

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates only if itsenses that one or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system works the front brakes and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin. It may also upshiftthe transmission to limit wheel spin. You may feelor hear the system working, but this is normal.

The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message on theDriver Information Center (DIC) will be displayedwhen the system is limiting wheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow safe use ofthe cruise control, it can be used again. See CruiseControl on page 3-10.

The TCS operates in all transmission shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift the transmissiononly as high as the shift lever position that was chosen,so use the lower gears only when necessary. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 2-29.

This light, along with theTRACTION CONTROLOFF message, will displayon the DIC for threeseconds when the TCS isnot on.

If there is a problem with the system, the SERVICETRACTION SYSTEM message will also come on in theDIC. When this warning light is on, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TCS on. Butyou can turn the system off if you ever need to. The TCSshould be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck insand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-21and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 4-20.

To turn the TCS on or off, press the TCS button locatedabove the radio.

4-6

When the TCS is turned off, the TCS warning light willcome on along with the TRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage on the DIC. It will disappear when the TCS isturned back on. If the TCS is limiting wheel spinwhen the TCS button is pressed, the TCS warning lightwill come on and the TCS will turn off right away.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectyour vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The system operatesonly if it senses that one or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, the system reduces engine power andmay also upshift the transmission to limit wheelspin. You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message on theDriver Information Center (DIC) will be displayedwhen the system is limiting wheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when ETS begins tolimit wheel spin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow safe use of it,the cruise control can be used again. See Cruise Controlon page 3-10.

The ETS operates in all transmission shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift the transmissiononly as high as the chosen shift lever position, souse the lower gears only when necessary. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 2-29.

This warning light, alongwith the TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message,will display on the DICfor three seconds when theETS is not on.

If there is a problem with the system, the SERVICETRACTION SYSTEM message will also come on in theDIC. When this warning light is on, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

4-7

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the ETS on. Butyou can turn the system off if you ever need to. The ETSshould be turned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck insand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required

To turn the ETS on or off, press the Traction Controlbutton located above the radio.

When the ETS is turned off, the ETS warning light willcome on along with the TRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage on the DIC. It will disappear when the ETS isturned back on. If the ETS is limiting wheel spin when thetraction control button is pressed, the ETS warning lightwill come on and the ETS will turn off right away.

StabiliTrak ® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called StabiliTrak®. It is anadvanced computer controlled system that assists youwith directional control of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses adiscrepancy between your intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressure at anyone of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehiclein the direction which you are steering.

When the system activates, a STABILITY CONTROLACTIVE message will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58. You may also hear a noise orfeel vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continueto steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go.

If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®, aSERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM or STABILITYCONTROL OFF message will be displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC). A warning light will alsoappear on the instrument panel cluster. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-58. When thismessage is displayed, the system is not operational.Driving should be adjusted accordingly.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak®

activates, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow you to safelyuse it again, you may reengage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 3-10 for more information.

For vehicles with the 5.3L V8 engine, StabiliTrak® canbe turned off by pressing and holding the traction controlbutton, located above the radio, for approximately fiveseconds. A STABILITY CONTROL OFF message will bedisplayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC)when StabiliTrak® is turned off. StabiliTrak® will remainoff until the traction control button is pressed once toturn it back on, or until the engine is started.

4-8

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the road surface, the angle atwhich the curve is banked, and your speed. While you arein a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do their workwhere the tires meet the road. Unless you have antilockbrakes, adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steering througha sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Thosetwo control systems — steering and acceleration — canoverwhelm those places where the tires meet the roadand make you lose control. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 4-7, and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you will want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the frontwheels are straight ahead.

4-9

Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steering around theproblem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes. See Braking onpage 4-3. It is better to remove as much speed as youcan from a possible collision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or right depending on the spaceavailable.

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-10

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,we suggest the following tips:

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass. Ifin doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

4-11

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels arenot rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid onlythe acceleration skid. If your traction control system isoff, then an acceleration skid is also best handledby easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, youwill want to slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

4-12

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to alower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires toslide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilyour vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow onthe road to make a mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helpsavoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving becausesome drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol ordrugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because your headlamps can onlylight up so much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,as we get older, these differences increase. A50-year-old driver might need at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-13

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Alwaysdrive slower in these types of driving conditionsand avoid driving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. Driving through flowing water couldcause your vehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsand be very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. Thebest advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-63.

4-14

Before Leaving on a Long TripTo prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider havingit serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.

Things to check on your own include:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windowsclean — inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: In good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?

• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?

• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated torecommended pressure?

• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-datemaps?

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

4-15

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could getso hot that they would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Shift downto let the engine assist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down and theycould get so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You could crash.Always have the engine running and yourvehicle in gear when you go downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-16

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You might want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,if you will be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-63.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tires meet theroad probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation.You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to bevery careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snowor ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet icecan be even more trouble because it can offer the leasttraction of all. You can get wet ice when it is aboutfreezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Tryto avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crewscan get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,or loose snow — drive with caution.

4-17

A traction system improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even though you havea traction system, slow down and adjust your drivingto the road conditions. Under certain conditions,you might want to turn the traction system off, such aswhen driving through deep snow and loose gravel,to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6, EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 4-7, and StabiliTrak®

System on page 4-8.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road. Even though you have ABS, beginstopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that is covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear inshaded areas where the sun cannot reach, suchas around clumps of trees, behind buildings,or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curveor an overpass can remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch ofice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try notto brake while you are actually on the ice, andavoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

4-18

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You cannot see itor smell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking the exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that is away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with the headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

4-19

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free yourvehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-21.

If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s tractionsystem in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severefor the traction system to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-84.

4-20

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear thearea around the front wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-6, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-7,and StabiliTrak® System on page 4-8. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,spinning the wheels as little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinningbefore shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal whileyou shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal whenthe transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the wheelsin the forward and reverse directions, you will cause arocking motion that could free your vehicle. If that doesnot get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need tobe towed out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-27.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry, theTire and Loading Information label and theVehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

4-21

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post(striker).

The Tire and Loading Information label lists thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds. The vehicle capacity weightincludes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 5-63 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-70.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.Label Example

4-22

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage andcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weightmay not safely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 4-28 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

4-23

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs(453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

4-24



1,000 lbs(453 kg)


1,000 lbs(453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Example 3

4-25

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,spread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else are put inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

4-26

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-8.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a dolly.

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, youwill want to make sure your vehicle is prepared tobe towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Tripon page 4-15.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetrain components couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all fourwheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that followsfor more information.

4-27

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow yourvehicle using a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove theignition key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — or evenat all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer with yourvehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it has the proper trailertowing equipment. To identify the trailering capacityof your vehicle, read the information in “Weight of theTrailer” that appears later in this section. Traileringis different than just driving the vehicle by itself.

4-28

Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,braking, durability, and fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct equipment, and it has to beused properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please read this section carefullybefore pulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, wheel assembly, and tires are forced towork harder against the drag of the added weight.The engine is required to operate at relatively higherspeeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat.What is more, the trailer adds considerably to windresistance, increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you will be driving. A good sourcefor this information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) the vehicle is driven. The engine, axle orother parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatthe vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speedfor trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), tosave wear on the vehicle’s parts.

There are three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires

4-29

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Buteven that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull atrailer are all important. It can also depend on anyspecial equipment that is on the vehicle, and the amountof tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only thedriver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the requiredtrailering equipment. The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information oradvice, or write us at our Customer AssistanceOffices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6for more information.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo in it,and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. Ifthere are a lot of options, equipment, passengers orcargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight thevehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailerweight the vehicle can tow. And if you tow a trailer, youmust add the tongue load to the GVW because thevehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-21 for more informationabout the vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

4-30

When using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue(A) should weigh 10 percent to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight (B).

After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and thetongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. Thecorrect weight could be achieved simply by movingsome items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limitfor cold tires. These numbers can be found on theTire-Loading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-21. Be sure not to go over the GVWlimit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue. If a weight distribution hitchis used, make sure not to go over the rear axle limitbefore applying the weight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch is needed. Hereare some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended forhitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• If holes need to be made in the body of the vehicle toinstall a trailer hitch, then be sure to seal the holeslater when the hitch is removed. If the holes are notsealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 2-37. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsChains should always be attached between the vehicleand the trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack so the rig can be turned.And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

4-31

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to readand follow the instructions for the trailer brakes soyou’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain themproperly.

• If your vehicle has antilock brakes, do not try to tapinto your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, bothbrake systems will not work well, or at all.

• Even if your vehicle does not have antilockbrakes, do not tap into your vehicle’s brake systemif the trailer’s brake system will use more than0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’smaster cylinder. If it does, both braking systemswill not work well. You could even lose your brakes.

• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brakesystem must not be used with your vehicle.

• If everything checks out this far, then make thebrake fluid tap at the upper rear master cylinderport. But do not use copper tubing for this. If you do,it will bend and break off. Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, get to know the rig.Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer. And always keep inmind that the vehicle is now a good deal longer and notnearly as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be surethe brakes are working. This lets you check theelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

4-32

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead aswhen driving the vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp avoid situations that require heavy brakingand sudden turns.

PassingMore passing distance is needed up ahead whentowing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is a good deallonger with the trailer, you will need to go much fartherbeyond the vehicle you have passed before youcan return to the proper lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns thannormal. Do this so the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen towing a trailer, the vehicle may need a differentturn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with yourdealer/retailer. The arrows on the instrument panel willflash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properlyhooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling otherdrivers you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. You may think drivers behind youare seeing your signal when they are not. It is importantto check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs arestill working.

4-33

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before startingdown a long hill or steep downgrade. If the vehicle is notshifted down, the brakes might have to be used so muchthat they would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce thevehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of engine and transmission overheating.

If towing a trailer, you may want to drive in THIRD (3)instead of DRIVE (D). Shift to a lower gear as needed.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, here ishow to do it:

1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer’swheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply the parkingbrake, and shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

4-34

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• Start the engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingThe vehicle will need service more often when it pulls atrailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 formore information. Things that are especially important intrailer operation are automatic transmission fluid;which should not be overfilled; engine oil, drive belt(s),and cooling and brake systems. Each of these iscovered in this manual, and the Index will help you findthem quickly. If trailering, it is a good idea to reviewthis information before starting on a trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingThe cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-30.

4-35

✍ NOTES

4-36

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-11Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-18Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-21Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-23Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-25Engine Coolant .............................................5-27Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29Pressure Cap ...............................................5-30

Engine Overheating .......................................5-30Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ........................................5-32Cooling System ............................................5-33Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-43Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-44Brakes ........................................................5-46Battery ........................................................5-49Jump Starting ...............................................5-50

Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-56Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-58

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-58Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps ...................................5-59License Plate Lamp ......................................5-61Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-61

Windshield Replacement .................................5-62Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-62Tires ..............................................................5-63

Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-64Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-67Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-70Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-71Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-73

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-75When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-77Buying New Tires .........................................5-78Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-80Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-80Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-82Wheel Replacement ......................................5-82Tire Chains ..................................................5-84If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-86Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-87Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-88Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-89Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

(Base Model) ............................................5-95Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

(Super Only) .............................................5-97Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-98

Appearance Care ............................................5-99Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-99Fabric/Carpet ..............................................5-100Leather ......................................................5-101Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces .................................................5-101Care of Safety Belts ....................................5-102Weatherstrips .............................................5-102

Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-102Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-103Finish Care ................................................5-103Windshield and Wiper Blades .......................5-104Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels

and Trim ................................................5-104Tires .........................................................5-105Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-105Finish Damage ...........................................5-105Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-106Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-106Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-106

Vehicle Identification .....................................5-107Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-107Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-108

Electrical System ..........................................5-108Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-108Headlamp Wiring ........................................5-109Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-109Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-109Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-109Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-110Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-112

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-116Capacities and Specifications ........................5-116

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added toyour vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems likeantilock brakes, traction control and stability control.Some of these accessories could even causemalfunction or damage not covered by warranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle. Your GMdealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GMdealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you willknow that GM-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-67.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, andsome component wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

5-3

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteriescontained in remote keyless entry transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials. Special handling may benecessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.



• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts,and tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, andother fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work, youshould use the proper service manual. It tells you muchmore about how to service your vehicle than thismanual can. To order the proper service manual, seeService Publications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noiseand can affect fuel economy and windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer/retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep theengine clean and maintain optimum vehicleperformance, we recommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.

The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)shows the code letter or number that identifies yourvehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) on page 5-107.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine (VIN Code 2),use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knocking noise when youdrive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7),use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailertowing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octaneunleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knocking noise when youdrive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

5-5

If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code C),use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleadedgasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’sacceleration could be slightly reduced, and you mightnotice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you mightnotice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage theengine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needsservice.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 foradditional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionsStandards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meetCalifornia specifications. See the underhood emissioncontrol label. If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, butemission control system performance might be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and yourvehicle might fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-42. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determinedthat the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by your warranty.

5-6

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. In mostcases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectorsand intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct andprevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be availablein your area. We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with the specifications describedearlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under yourwarranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of theemission control system could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would not becovered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire cancause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries toyou and others, read and follow all theinstructions on the pump island. Turn off yourengine when you are refueling. Do not smokeif you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.Do not leave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against the lawin some places. Do not re-enter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel. Keep children away fromthe fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from thehook on the fuel door.

5-8

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could be badlyburned. This spray can happen if your tank isnearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hissnoise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill thetank and wait a few seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel frompainted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing YourVehicle on page 5-102.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuelto evaporate into the atmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 3-42.

Your vehicle may also have a check gas cap warninglight, which will be displayed on the instrument panelcluster if the fuel cap is not properly installed. See CheckGas Cap Light on page 3-49 for more information.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),the CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-58 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, do notremove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one foryou. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-42.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the fuel vapor. Youcan be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

Checking Things Under theHood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the interior hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it. It islocated to the left of thesteering column belowthe instrument panel.

2. Push the secondary hood release lever, locatedunder the center of the hood above the grille, upand to the right to disengage it.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, make sure all the filler capsare properly secured. Pull the hood down and closeit firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, this is what you will see:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-44.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-49.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-50.D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block

on page 5-112.E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger

Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System

on page 5-33.G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 5-43.H. Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap on

page 5-29.

I. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-18.

J. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling Systemon page 5-33.

K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-18.

L. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-25.

M. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-46.

N. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-23.

5-13

When you open the hood on the 3.8L V6 engine, this is what you will see:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-44.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-49.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-50.D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger

Compartment Air Filter on page 3-29.E. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block

on page 5-112.F. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling System

on page 5-33.G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Cap

on page 5-29.H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Out of View). See

Power Steering Fluid on page 5-43.

I. Electric Engine Cooling Fans. See Cooling Systemon page 5-33.

J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-18.

K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-18.

L. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-25.

M. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to AddCoolant to the Radiator” under Cooling System onpage 5-33.

N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-46.

O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-23.

5-15

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

5-16

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “AddingWasher Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluidon page 5-44.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-49.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block

on page 5-112.D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-50.E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 5-30.F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 5-43.G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-18.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-18.

I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 5-25.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 5-46.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-23.

L. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling Systemon page 5-33.

5-17

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

3.6L V6 Engine

3.8L V6 Engine

5-18

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip ofthe dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of therecommended oil. This section explains what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 5-116.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.Push the dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

5.3L V8 Engine

5-19

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only anoil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is bestfor your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosityoils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil hasbeen certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, and useonly those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbolon the front of the oil container.Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered by yourwarranty.If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easiercold starting and better protection for the engine atextremely low temperatures.

5-20

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and engine temperature, and noton mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change will be indicated can varyconsiderably. For the oil life system to work properly, youmust reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A change engine oil light or, if your vehiclehas the Driver Information Center (DIC), a CHANGE OILSOON message will come on. See Change Engine OilLight on page 3-45 or DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 3-58. Change the oil as soon as possible within thenext 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the oil life system mightnot indicate that an oil change is necessary for over ayear. However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people whowill perform this work using genuine parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to check the oil regularly andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the lastoil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-21

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change the oil prior to achange engine oil light or CHANGE OIL SOON messagebeing turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil, reset the system:

• Vehicles with Driver Information Center (DIC)

1. Press the option button on the DIC untilENGINE OIL MONITOR appears on theDIC screen.

2. Press the set/reset button to reset the system.The next screen indicates that the CHANGEOIL SOON message has been reset.

If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC, when thegages button is pressed and the OILLIFE REMAINING mode appears, it shouldread 100 percent OIL LIFE REMAINING.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

• Vehicles without Driver Information Center (DIC)

1. With the engine off, turn the ignition key toON/RUN.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalslowly three times within five seconds.

3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, then start thevehicle.

If the light or message comes back on when you startyour vehicle, the oil life system has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a good handcleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer, aservice station, or a local recycling center for help.

5-22

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change after each50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If youare driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filterat each engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter fromthe vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loosedust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter do thefollowing:

3.8L V6 Engine shown, 3.6L Engine similar

5-23

1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engine aircleaner/filter housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through theslots on the housing. If your vehicle has one of theV6 engines, a notch on the sides of the filter coverwill indicate the correct engagement.

6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing to lockthe cover in place.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned.The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helpsto stop flames if the engine backfires. If it isnot there and the engine backfires, you couldbe burned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easilyget into your engine, which will damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in place when you aredriving.

5.3L V8 Engine

5-24

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check the automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealer/retailer servicedepartment.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transmission. Too much can mean that someof the fluid could come out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F(82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have todrive longer.

5-25

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the enginerunning.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each one. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

The transmission fluiddipstick handle has thissymbol on it, and is locatednear the rear of the enginecompartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way.

5-26

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transmission fluid to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on thedipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally less than onepint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmissionfluid may damage your vehicle, and the damagesmay not be covered by your warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if only DEX-COOL®

extended life coolant is added.The following explains the cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If there is a problem withengine overheating or if coolant needs to be added to theradiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-30.A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at the first maintenanceservice after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-27

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® engine coolant which will notdamage aluminum parts. If this coolant mixture is used,nothing else needs to be added.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid such as alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’scoolant warning system is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain water or the wrongmixture, your engine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheat warning. Yourengine could catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core, andother parts.

If coolant needs to be added more than four times ayear, have your dealer/retailer check the cooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additivesin your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damageyour vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of theengine coolant listed in this manual for the coolingsystem. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-12 for more information.

Checking Coolant

The coolant recovery tankis located in the enginecompartment toward therear of the engine on thepassenger side of thevehicle.

If your vehicles is equipped with the 5.3L engine thecoolant recovery tank is located in the enginecompartment toward the rear of the engine on the driverside of the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for more information on location.

5-28

The vehicle must be on a level surface when checkingthe coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe COLD FILL line or a little higher. The COLD FILLline is near the bottom of the recovery tank and has anarrow pointing down at it.

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, addcoolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-30.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. With the coolant recovery tank, you willalmost never have to add coolant at theradiator. Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. Forinformation on how to add coolant to the radiator,see Cooling System on page 5-33.

Radiator Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of theengine compartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

5-29

Pressure CapNotice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,coolant loss and possible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperature gage and a warning lighton the instrument panel cluster that indicate anoverheated engine condition. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-40 and Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light on page 3-40 for moreinformation.

In addition, if your vehicle is equipped with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), you will find an ENGINECOOLANT HOT and a REDUCED POWER STOPWHEN SAFE message displayed on the DIC. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 3-58 for moreinformation.

5-30

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Turn it off and get everyoneaway from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam or coolant beforeyou open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehicles engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicleuntil the engine is cool.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 5-32 for information on driving toa safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can bebadly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode on page 5-32 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let theengine idle.

2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat settingand fan speed and open the windows as necessary.

5-31

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later inthis section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,you will notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The REDUCED POWER STOP WHENSAFE message will come on in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), if the vehicle has one, along with theengine coolant temperature warning light on theinstrument panel, to indicate the vehicle has enteredoverheated engine protection operating mode. Thetemperature gage will also indicate an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailerin the overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.

5-32

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this is whatyou will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Radiator Pressure CapC. Electric Engine Cooling Fans3.6L V6 Engine

3.8L V6 Engine

5-33

A. Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Coolant Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be ator above the COLD FILL line on the coolant recoverytank. If it is not, there may be a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump, or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5.3L V8 Engine

5-34

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the engine is overheating, the fans should be running.If the fans are not running, the vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant is not covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Mode onpage 5-32 for information on driving to a safe placein an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® maycause premature engine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant couldrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by the warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.

5-35

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain water, or some otherliquid such as alcohol, can boil before theproper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’scoolant warning system is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get too hot but youwould not get the overheat warning. Theengine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolantlevel is not at the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® enginecoolant at the coolant recovery tank. See EngineCoolant on page 5-27 for more information.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

5-36

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is atthe COLD FILL line, start the vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is one morething you can try. You can add the proper coolantmixture directly to the cooling system through thecoolant fill neck under the pressure cap, but be sure thesystem is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap — even a little — they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

5-37

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystem (3.6L V6 Engine)

Notice: The engine has a specific cooling systemdrain and fill procedure. Failure to follow thisprocedure could cause the engine to overheat andbe severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling systemneeds to be drained and re-filled, please see thedealer/retailer.

1. You can remove thepressure cap when thecooling system,including the pressurecap and upper radiatorhose is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans that there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.

{CAUTION:


3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for moreinformation about the proper coolant mixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engineand the compartment.

5-38

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLDFILL line.

6. Reinstall the coolant recovery tank cap and thepressure cap.

7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low,you should have your dealer/retailer servicedepartment inspect the vehicle for leaks.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator(3.8L V6 Engine)

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause your engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

1. You can remove theradiator pressure capwhen the coolingsystem, including theradiator pressure capand upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise untilit first stops. Do not press down while turning thepressure cap. If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

5-39

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now pushdown as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

3. Open the coolant airbleed valve located onthe thermostat housing,near the upperradiator hose.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for moreinformation about the proper coolant mixture.If you see a stream of coolant coming from the airbleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, closethe valve after the radiator is filled.


5-40


7. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressure cap off.

8. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.

9. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiatorfiller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until the level reaches thebase of the filler neck.

10. Then replace the radiator pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flow out ofthe filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be surethe pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

11. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level inthe coolant recovery tank should be at the COLDFILL line when the engine is cold.

5-41

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystem (5.3L V8 Engine)

Notice: The engine has a specific cooling systemdrain and fill procedure. Failure to follow thisprocedure could cause the engine to overheat andbe severely damaged. If the engine’s cooling systemneeds to be drained and re-filled, please see thedealer/retailer.

1. You can remove thepressure cap when thecooling system,including the pressurecap and upperradiator hose is nolonger hot. Turnthe pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans that there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap and remove it.

{CAUTION:


3. Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 Engine Coolantfor more information about the proper coolantmixture.


5-42


6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and thepressure cap. After a day or two of driving, when theengine is cold, check the coolant level in therecovery tank. If it is low, refill it to the COLDFILL line.

If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low, youshould have a dealer/retailer service departmentinspect the vehicle for leaks.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired.

5-43

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartmentcool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.

If your vehicle has the 3.8L V6 engine or the5.3L V8 engine, the fluid level should be between theADD and HOT marks when the engine is cold, andat the HOT mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid isat the ADD mark when the engine is cold or hot,power steering fluid should be added.

If your vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine, the fluid levelshould be between the Min (Minimum) and Max(Maximum) marks when the engine is cold, and at theMax mark when the engine is hot. If the fluid is at theMin mark when the engine is cold or hot, power steeringfluid should be added.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage yourvehicle and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

5-44

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid is low, a low washerfluid light may appear on the instrument panel cluster.See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light on page 3-47for more information.

In addition, if your vehicle has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the LOW WASHER FLUID message willdisplay when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 3-58 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for reservoirlocation.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

5-45

BrakesBrake Fluid

The brake master cylinderreservoir is filled withDOT-3 brake fluid. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 forthe location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that the brakefluid goes down to an acceptable level during normalbrake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluidlevel goes back up. The other reason is that fluid isleaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, youshould have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or later the brakes will notwork well.It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Addingbrake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added whenthe linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when

new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn if theengine is hot enough. You or others could beburned, and your vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light comes on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-37.

What to AddWhen you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid.Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirtfrom entering the reservoir.

5-46

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakehydraulic system, the brakes might not workwell. This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakehydraulic system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in the brake hydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system parts so badly that theywill have to be replaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.If you do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-102.

Brake WearYour vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads havebuilt-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warningsound when the brake pads are worn and new pads

are needed. The sound can come and go or be heardall the time your vehicle is moving, except when you arepushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. That couldlead to an accident. When you hear the brakewear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withthe brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torque specifications inCapacities and Specifications on page 5-116.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

5-47

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When you replace parts of the braking system — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and youneed new ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might notwork properly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance you have come toexpect can change in many other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts.

5-48

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it istime for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for onethat has the replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

If the battery has a very low charge or is dead, youmight not be able to remove the ignition key from theignition switch or shift out of PARK (P). See Shifting Outof PARK (P) on page 2-35.

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youare not careful. See Jump Starting onpage 5-50 for tips on working around a batterywithout getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.This will help keep the battery from running down.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,remove the black, negative (−) cable from the batteryor use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintainthe charge of the battery over an extended periodof time.

5-49

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want touse another vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do itsafely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that would not be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmissionin NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

5-50

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off theradio and all lamps that are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. And itcould save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations onthat vehicle.You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jumpstarting. It has a remote positive (+) jump startingterminal, located on the underhood fuse block,for that purpose. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information onlocation.

If your vehicle has aV6 engine, to uncoverthe remote positive (+)terminal, press the tab atthe bottom of the fuse blockand lift the cover up.

3.8L V6 Engine shown,3.6L V6 Engine

similar

5-51

Always use the remote positive (+) terminal insteadof the positive (+) terminal on the battery.

If your vehicle has the5.3L V8 engine, to uncoverthe remote positive (+)terminal, remove the fuseblock cover.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You donot need to add water to the battery installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery hasfillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid isthere. If it is low, add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gas could bepresent.


5.3L Engine

5-52


Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get itin your eyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical help immediately.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Notice: If you connect a negative cable to theEngine Control Module (ECM), ECM mountingbracket or any cables that attach to the ECMbracket, you may damage the ECM. Attach thenegative cable to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart, other than the ECM, ECM bracket or cablesattached to the ECM bracket.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

3.8L V6 Engine shown, 3.6L V6 Engine similar

5-53

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal location on the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle withthe good battery. Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal location on the vehicle withthe good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminalif the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoes not go to the dead battery. It goes to aheavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (–) terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

5.3L Engine

5-54

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the fuse block cover to its original position.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-55

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustmentHowever, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, theheadlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may benecessary.If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, thismay also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.The vehicle should:• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from

a light colored wall.• Have all four tires on a perfectly level surface which

is level all the way to the wall.• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.• Not have any snow, ice or mud on it.• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while

headlamp aiming is being done.• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one

person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver seat.• Have all tires properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beamheadlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctlyaimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.

Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws underthe hood near the headlamps.

The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mmmale hex.

5-56

To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beamheadlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aimdot on the low-beam headlamp. Record thedistance.

4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) tothe recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beamcut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-up which may causedamage to the headlamp.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall thewidth of the vehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being adjusted. Do not place directlyon the headlamp. This allows only the beam of lightfrom the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.

5-57

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, whichare under the hood near each headlamp assembly.The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mmmale hex.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlampbeam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn itclockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower theangle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tapeline. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows theincorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-61.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

5-58

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up LampsTo replace a taillamp, turn signal, sidemarker, stoplampor back-up lamp bulb:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.

3. Remove the four plastic wing nuts retaining thetrunk trim. There are two wing nuts located onthe driver side (shown) and two located on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

4. Pull back the trunk trim.

5-59

5. Remove the two wing nuts holding the taillampassembly in place.

6. Pull out the taillamp assembly and disconnect thewiring harness.

A. TaillampB. Back-upC. Taillamp

D. Stoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal

E. Sidemarker

7. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it.

8. Replace with a new bulb.

9. Turn the bulb socket clockwise to reinstall.

10. Reverse these steps to reinstall the taillampassembly.

5-60

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the screws for either of the license platelamps.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the licenseplate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps Bulb NumberBack-Up Lamps 921Rear Sidemarker, License PlateLamp, and Taillamp 194

Stoplamps and Taillamps 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact yourdealer/retailer.

5-61

Windshield ReplacementYour vehicle is equipped with an acoustic windshield.If you ever have to have your windshield replacedbe sure to get an acoustic windshield so you willcontinue to have the benefits an acoustic windshieldcan provide.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected for wearor cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4for more information on wiper blade inspection.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For the proper type andlength, see Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 6-13. Here is how to remove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away fromthe windshield.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip up fromthe blade connecting point, and pull the bladeassembly down toward the windshield to remove itfrom the wiper arm.

3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm andsnap the clip into place.

5-62

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warrantybooklet for details.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch flexing. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-21.

• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.



• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

5-63

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size : The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification) : Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tires based onthree performance factors: treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance. For more information seeUniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-80.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

5-64

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit : Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only : The compact spare tireor temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 5-98 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 5-86.

(B) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-65

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit : Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation : The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-70.

(F) Tire Size : A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification) : Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

5-66

(C) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as itis wide.

(D) Construction Code : A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description : These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and DefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount of air inside thetire pressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight : This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-70.

5-67

Curb Weight : The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, butwithout passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), analphanumeric designator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and dateof production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-21.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-21.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21.

Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. Themaximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight : The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight : The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-21.

Occupant Distribution : Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle. Theside of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on the other sidewall ofthe tire.

5-68

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-21.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction : The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 5-77.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards) : A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 5-80.

Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-21.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-21.

5-69

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 4-21. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 5-98.

5-70

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even when they areunder-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get apressure measurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommended pressure onthe Tire and Loading Information label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure islow, add air until you reach the recommendedamount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radioand sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. TheTPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’stires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should bechecked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehicle manufactureron the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

5-71

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for propertire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicatoris combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73, foradditional information.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates ona radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates ona radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry and Science Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:




5-72

Tire Pressure Monitor OperationThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designedto warn the driver when a low tire pressure conditionexists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire andwheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheelassembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inthe vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readingsto a receiver located in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, theTPMS illuminates the lowtire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrumentpanel cluster.

If your vehicle has the uplevel Driver Information Center(DIC), a warning message to check the pressure in aspecific tire displays at the same time the low tirepressure warning light comes on. The low tire pressurewarning light and the DIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct

inflation pressure. Vehicles that have the uplevel DICbuttons can also check tire pressure levels by pressingthe gages button. For additional information and detailsabout the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operationand Displays on page 3-50 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 3-58

The low tire pressure warning light may come on in coolweather when the vehicle is first started, and then turnoff as you start to drive. This could be an early indicatorthat the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low andneed to be inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to yourvehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s originalequipment tires and the correct inflation pressure foryour vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 4-21, for an example of the Tireand Loading Information label and its location on yourvehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-75 and Tires on page 5-63.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tire sealant is notcovered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

5-73

TPMS Malfunction Light and MessageThe TPMS will not function properly if one or more of theTPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the low tire warning lightflashes for about one minute and then stays on for theremainder of the ignition cycle. If your vehicle has theuplevel Driver Information Center (DIC), A DIC warningmessage is also displayed. The low tire warning light andDIC warning message come on at each ignition cycleuntil the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions thatcan cause the malfunction light and DIC message tocome on are:

• One of the road tires has been replaced with thespare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The TPMS malfunction light should go offonce you re-install the road tire containing the TPMSsensor.

• The TPMS sensor matching process was started butnot completed or not completed successfully afterrotating the vehicle’s tires. The TPMS malfunctionlight should go off once the TPMS sensor matchingprocess is performed successfully. See “TPMSSensor Matching Process” later in this section.

• One or more TPMS sensors are missing ordamaged. The TPMS malfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensormatching process is performed successfully. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

• Replacement tires or wheels do not match yourvehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than those recommended for yourvehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioningproperly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-78.

• Operating electronic devices or being near facilitiesusing radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMScould cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signala low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service ifthe TPMS malfunction light comes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching ProcessEach TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensorsor rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codesneed to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. Thesensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire, passenger side fronttire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tireusing a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer forservice.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’sair pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do notexceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on thetire’s sidewall.

5-74

To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the pointed end ofthe valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage,or a key.

You have two minutes to match each tire and wheelposition. If it takes longer than two minutes to match anytire and wheel position, the matching process stops andyou need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with theengine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’sLOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time forapproximately five seconds. The horn sounds twiceto signal the receiver is in relearn mode and theTPMS sensor matching process can begin.

4. Start with the driver side front tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds, oruntil a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, whichmay take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms thatthe sensor identification code has been matched tothe tire/wheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeatthe procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driverside rear tire, the horn chirps two more times tosignal the tire learning process has ended. Turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the tire and loading informationlabel.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Tire Inspection and RotationWe recommend that you regularly inspect yourvehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs ofwear or damage. See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 5-77 for more information.

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 6-4.

5-75

The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achievea uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thiswill ensure that your vehicle continues to performmost like it did when the tires were new.

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate the tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment.Also check for damaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-77 andWheel Replacement on page 5-82.

When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use thecorrect rotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in the tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 5-70 and Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-21.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See TirePressure Monitor Operation on page 5-73.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 5-116.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this; butbe sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. SeeChanging a Flat Tire on page 5-87.

5-76

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditionsinfluence when you need new tires.

One way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need new tires if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they arenot being used. This is also true for the spare tire, ifyour vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fastthis aging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsure aboutthe need to replace your tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for more information.

5-77

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new, were designed tomeet General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. Thisway, your vehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season tread design, the TPCSpec number will be followed by an MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-64 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.This is because uniform tread depth on all tires willhelp keep your vehicle performing most like it didwhen the tires were new. Replacing less than a fullset of tires can affect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 5-75 for information onproper tire rotation.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damage toyour vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on all wheels.It is all right to drive with your compactspare temporarily, as it was developed foruse on your vehicle. See Compact SpareTire on page 5-98.

5-78

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)as your vehicle’s original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoringsystem could give an inaccurate low-pressurewarning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installedon your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low-pressure warning that is higher or lowerthan the proper warning level you would get withTPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 5-71.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-21, for moreinformation about the Tire and Loading InformationLabel and its location on your vehicle.

5-79

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different size thanyour original equipment wheels and tires, this mayaffect the way your vehicle performs, including itsbraking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, andresistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes, tractioncontrol, and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, your vehiclemay not provide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels are selected.You may increase the chance that you willcrash and suffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems developed foryour vehicle, and have them properly installedby a GM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-78 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary use sparetires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

5-80

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) timesas well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, servicepractices, and differences in road characteristicsand climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

5-81

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing willnot be necessary on a regular basis. However, if younotice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to oneside or the other, the alignment might need to bechecked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to berebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminumwheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors, replace them only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have theright wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensorsfor your vehicle.

5-82

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-87 for moreinformation.

5-83

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it has beenused or how far it has been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/55R17 or P235/50R18size tires, do not use tire chains, there is notenough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can cause damageto the brakes, suspension or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tire chainscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand you or others may be injured in a crash.


5-84


Use another type of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combination and roadconditions. Follow that manufacturer’sinstructions.To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, and donot spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit, installthem on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other thanP225/55R17 or P235/50R18 size tires, use tire chainsonly where legal and only when you must. Use onlySAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size foryour tires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels withchains on will damage your vehicle.

5-85

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, hereare a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pullsthe vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you woulduse in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off thejack. Use the jack provided with your vehicleonly for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-86

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’shazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flasherson page 3-6 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehiclecan slip off the jack and roll over or fall on youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain in thevehicle.



To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you should put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from the onebeing changed. That would be the tire, on theother side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placement ofwheel blocks.

The following information tells you how to use the jackand change a tire.

5-87

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-14 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the convenience net if the vehicle has one.

3. Remove the spare tire cover.

4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and remove it.

5. Remove the compact spare tire.

6. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

5-88

The tools you will need to change a tire include thejack (A), extension and protection guide (B), and wheelwrench (C).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYou vehicle may have wheels with exposed wheel nuts.If so, go to the Removing the Wheel Nuts section. If thevehicle has steel wheel covers with plastic nut caps, thewheel nuts are hidden behind the cap. To remove thewheel cover:

1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changinga Flat Tire on page 5-87 for more information.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic wheelnut caps in a counterclockwise direction.If needed, finish loosening them by hand. The nutcaps will not come off of the wheel cover.The edge of the wheel cover could be sharp, so donot try to remove the cover with your bare hands.Do not drop the cap or lay it face down, as it couldbecome scratched or damaged.Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you havethe flat tire repaired or replaced.

Once you have removed the wheel cover or plastic nutcaps, use the following procedure to remove the flat tireand install the spare tire.

5-89

Removing the Wheel Nuts1. Place the wheel wrench securely over the wheel

nut. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise toloosen all the wheel nuts, but do no remove them yet.

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the jacklift head.

3. Find the jacking location using the diagram aboveand corresponding triangular-shaped hoistingnotches located on the underside of the vehicle’splastic molding.

The front location is about 6.5 inches (16.5 cm)from the rear edge of the front wheel well. The rearlocation is about 9 inches (22.8 cm) from the frontedge of the rear wheel well.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-90

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground for the compact spare tire to fit under thevehicle.

6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-91

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get allthe rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 5-87.

7. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfaces, andspare wheel.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

5-92

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end ofthe nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut byhand until the wheel is held against the hub.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-93

{CAUTION:

Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nutscan cause the wheel to come loose and evencome off. This could lead to a crash. If youhave to replace them, be sure to get neworiginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and have thenuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-116 for wheel nuttorque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-116 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

11. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’scompact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover or the spare could bedamaged.

5-94

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Base Model)

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

After the compact spare tire has been installed on thevehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with theextension protector, located in the foam holder, to helpavoid wheel surface damage.

To store a full-size tire:

1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunkarea and secure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and theprotector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainersecurely

4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put theprotector back in the foam holder.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replacethe compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon asyou can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-98. Use thisas a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.

5-95

A. CoverB. RetainerC. Compact Spare TireD. Wing NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension ProtectorH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

A. RetainerB. Full-Size Flat TireC. Protective GuideD. Extension Bolt ScrewE. Wing NutF. JackG. Wheel WrenchH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire Full-Size Flat Tire

5-96

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools (Super Only)

Super Model

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

After the compact spare tire has been installed on thevehicle, store the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extension with theprotector, located in the foam holder, to help avoidwheel surface damage.

To store a full-size tire:

1. Install the tools in their original location in the trunkarea and secure.

2. Place the tire valve stem facing down and theprotector/guide placed through a wheel bolt hole.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainersecurely

4. Store the cover as far forward as possible.

When storing a compact spare tire in the trunk, put theprotector back in the foam holder. When storing thecompact spare tire, the tire must be stored valvestem down.

The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replacethe compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon asyou can. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-98. Use thisas a guide for storing the compact spare tire and tools.

Compact Spare Tire

5-97

A. RetainerB. Full-Size Flat TireC. Protective GuideD. Extension Bolt ScrewE. Wing NutF. JackG. Wheel WrenchH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenthe vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stopas soon as possible and make sure the spare tire iscorrectly inflated. The compact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances upto 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip andhave the full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace the sparewith a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, donot take your vehicle through an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact spare can get caughton the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, andmaybe other parts of your vehicle.Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the sparetire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.Using them can damage your vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do not use tire chains onyour compact spare.

Full-Size Flat Tire

5-98

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirtcan accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particles fromyour upholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils shouldbe removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interiormay experience extremes of heat that could cause stainsto set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to your home furnishings may alsotransfer color to your vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on yourvehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’sinterior, maintain adequate ventilation by openingyour vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you canalso obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to removeodors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

5-99

Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleanersor techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage toyour vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressivelywith a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressurecan damage your interior and does not improve theeffectiveness of soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.Using too much soap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is agood guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result fromthe use of many organic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only beused on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first with plain water or clubsoda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper toweluntil no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

5-100

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner orspot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test asmall hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impression that a ring formationmay result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heatto dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spotlifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently change theappearance and feel of your leather and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents to cleanyour vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner. Never use shoe polish on leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearance and feel of yourinterior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organic solventsto clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniformmanner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on yourinstrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

5-101

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather frequent application may be required. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on yourvehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it statesthat it should not be used on plastic parts, do notuse it on your vehicle or damage may occur and itwould not be covered by the warranty.Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, asthey can damage the paint, metal or plastic on yourvehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-106. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.High pressure car washes may cause water to enter thevehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use ofpower washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) canresult in damage or removal of paint and decals.

5-102

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-102.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-106.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., candamage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

5-103

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, you may use chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for allbright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly whencleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim maybe damaged if you do not wash your vehicle afterdriving on roads that have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chromewith soap and water after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleanerswith acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them becauseyou could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polishon aluminum wheels.

5-104

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminumor chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicleequipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray from all paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

5-105

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, andexhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened before being flushed. Yourdealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, andsmall, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing Cloth Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewallsand raised white lettering.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

5-106

Description Usage

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects tires. No wipingnecessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot LifterQuickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and cloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. Thiscode helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 5-116 for your vehicle’sengine code.

5-107

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is in the trunk. It is very helpful if you everneed to order parts. The label has the followinginformation:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damage yourvehicle and the damage would not be covered byyour warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, evenif your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to your vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-66.

5-108

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on andoff, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, haveyour headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If theoverload is caused by some electrical problem, haveit fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse block protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When the currentload is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed orgoes away.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakersand in the fuse block wiring itself. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Make sure abad fuse is replaced with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

5-109

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The instrument panel fuseblock is located on thepassenger side of theinstrument panel. Pull offthe cover labeled FUSES toexpose the fuse block.

5-110

Fuses UsageDR/LCKTRUNK Door Locks, Trunk

RFA/MOD Remote Keyless EntryPRK/SWTCH Ignition Key Lock

CLSTR ClusterSTR/WHL/

ILLUM Steering Wheel Controls Illumination

ONSTAR/ALDL OnStar®, Data LinkINT/ILLUM Interior LampsPWR/SEAT Power Seat

S/ROOF SunroofCNSTR Canister VentHVAC Climate Control System

HAZRD Turn Signal, HazardPRK/LAMP Park Lamps

Fuses Usage

CHMSL/BKUP Center-High-MountedStoplamp/Back-up Lamps

PWR/MIR Power MirrorsCRUISE Cruise Control

RDO/AMP Radio, AmplifierHTD/SEAT Heated SeatsHTD/MIR Heated Mirrors

PWR/WNDW Power Window

Relays UsageRAP Retained Accessory Power

PRK/LAMP Park Lamp RelayR/DEFOG Rear Defogger Relay

5-111

Underhood Fuse BlockSome fuses and relays are located in the underhood fuseblock on the passenger side of the vehicle in the enginecompartment. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical componentson your vehicle may damage it. Always keep thecovers on any electrical component.

Mini-Fuses Usage1 Driver Side High-Beam2 Passenger Side High-Beam

Mini-Fuses Usage3 Driver Side Low-Beam4 Passenger Side Low-Beam5 Windshield Wiper6 Washer/Regulated Voltage Control7 Fog Lamps8 Transmission Control Module9 Supplemental Inflatable Restraint

10 Auxiliary Power11 Horn12 Emission13 Air Conditioner Clutch14 Oxygen Sensor15 Powertrain Control Module

16 Powertrain Control Module,Electronic Throttle Control

17 Electronic Throttle Control18 Display19 Antilock Brake Solenoid20 Fuel Injector21 Transmission Solenoid

3.6L & 3.8L V6 Engines

5-112

Mini-Fuses Usage22 Fuel Pump23 Antilock Brake System24 Ignition

J-Style Fuses Usage25 Air Pump26 Battery Main 127 Battery Main 228 Battery Main 329 Fan 130 Battery Main 431 Antilock Brake System Motor32 Fan 233 Starter

Micro-Relays Usage34 Headlamp High-Beam35 Headlamp Driver Module36 Fog Lamp37 Ignition 1

Micro-Relays Usage38 Air Conditioning Compressor39 Horn40 Powertrain41 Fuel Pump

Mini-Relays Usage42 Fan 143 Fan 344 Windshield Wiper High45 Windshield Wiper46 Fan 248 Crank

Fuse Puller Usage55 Fuse Puller

Diodes Usage

§ Air Conditioner Compressor ClutchDiode

5-113

Fuses UsageHVAC Climate Control System

FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpAIRBAG/DISPLAY Airbag, Display

COMPASS CompassABS Antilock Brake System

Fuses Usage

ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control, EngineControl Module

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorINJ 1 Injectors 1

ECM/TCM Engine Control Module,Transmission Control Module

TRANS TransmissionEMISSIONS1 Emissions 1

ABS SOL Antilock Brake SolenoidECM IGN Engine Control Module, Ignition

INJ 2 Injectors 2EMISSIONS2 Emissions 2

WPR Windshield WipersAUX PWR Auxiliary Power

WSW/RVC Windshield Washer, RegulatedVoltage Control

LT LO BEAM Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp

RT LO BEAM Passenger Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

FOG LAMPS Fog LampsLT HI BEAM Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp

5.3L V8 Engine

5-114

Fuses UsageHORN Horn

RT HI BEAM Passenger Side High-BeamHeadlamp

BATT 4 Battery 4BATT 1 Battery 1STRTR Starter

ABS MTR Antilock Brake System MotorBATT 3 Battery 3BATT 2 Battery 2FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

Relays UsageFUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorPWR/TRN Powertrain

STRTR StarterFAN 3 Cooling Fan 3FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1HDM Headlamp Driver Module

5-115

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transmission (Drain and Refill) 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir

3.6L V6 and 3.8L V6 Engine 11.2 qt 10.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine 13.3 qt 12.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3.6L V6 Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L



Fuel Tank

3.8LV6 Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME,VT, NY, MA (see your dealer/retailer for bordering states) 17.0 gal 64.4 L

3.8LV6 Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all otherstates (see your dealer/retailer for more information) 17.5 gal 66.2 L

5-116

Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)

Application

Capacities

English Metric

3.6LV6 Engine sold new in all states 17.5 gal 66.2 L

5.3L V8 Engine 17.5 gal 66.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine 7 Automatic 0.044 inches (1.1 mm)

3.8L V6 Engine 2 Automatic 0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

5.3 V8 Engine with Active FuelManagement™ C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

5-117

✍ NOTES

5-118

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4Additional Required Services ............................6-6Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-13Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-14Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or yourdealer/retailer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,replacement parts, and recommended fluids andlubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessaryto keep your vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. All recommended maintenance isimportant. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluidlevels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level ofemissions from your vehicle. To help protect ourenvironment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help you keep your vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you willdrive it. You might drive very short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you might drive long distances allthe time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these limits on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-21.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4should be performed when indicated. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 6-6 and MaintenanceFootnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job.



If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailerto have a qualified technician do the work. SeeDoing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should have yourdealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for your serviceneeds, you will know that trained and supported servicetechnicians will perform the work using genuine parts.

If you want to purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-16.

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you whatshould be checked, when to check it, and what you caneasily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants touse are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-12 and Maintenance Replacement Partson page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make surethese are used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuineparts from your dealer/retailer.

6-3

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the change engine oil light or CHANGE OIL SOONDIC message comes on, it means that service is requiredfor your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicleservice is necessary for over a year. However, the engineoil and filter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service technicians who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles(5 000 km) since the last service. Remember to resetthe oil life system whenever the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System on page 5-21 for information onthe Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the light or message appears, certain services,checks, and inspections are required. Required servicesare described in the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that thefirst service be Maintenance I, the second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternate Maintenance Iand Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the light ormessage comes on within 10 months since the vehiclewas purchased or Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previousservice performed was Maintenance I. Always useMaintenance II whenever the light or message comeson 10 months or more since the last service or if the lightor message has not come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-18. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-21. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-23. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 5-75 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 6-9.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

6-5

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-23. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (severe service). Seefootnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service. Seefootnote (m).

•

6-6

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspectdisc brake pads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts asneeded. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure testof the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-62 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-104 for more information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safetybelt assemblies are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If yousee anything that might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn orfrayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checkingthe Restraint Systems on page 1-68.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hingesand latches, including those for the body doors,hood, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, releasepawl, rear compartment, glove box door, and consoledoor. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, thefilter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

6-7

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace parts asneeded. Replace any components that have high effortor excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator orcruise control cables.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repairedand the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspectthe filter at each engine oil change.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,dependability, and emission control performance of yourvehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by your warranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-18.

6-8

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-27.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they areinflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to checkthe spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-70. Check to make sure the spare tire is storedsecurely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-87.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileage highwaydrivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System servicenotification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-75.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicleshould start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Ifthe vehicle starts in any other position, contact yourdealer/retailer for service.

6-9

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-32.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailerfor service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF onlywhen the shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only inLOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

6-10

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and the transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure fromthe regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Thenrelease the parking brake followed by the regularbrake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-11

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-18.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-27.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,and Release

Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

6-12

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco ® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3.6L and 3.8L Engines 15221217 A1614C

5.3L Engine 10350737 A2962C

Engine Oil Filter

3.6L V6 and 5.3L V8 Engines 89017524 PF48

3.8L V6 Engine 25010792 PF47

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs

3.6L V6 Engine 12597464 41-990

3.8L V6 Engine 12568387 41-101

5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly – 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)

Driver’s Side 15941735 —

Passenger’s Side 15941736 —

6-13

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

3.8L V6 Engine

6-14

5.3L V8 Engine

6-15

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additionalinformation from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

6-16

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-5Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-6Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-8Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10Collision Damage Repair ................................7-12

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ....................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-15Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors .........................................7-16Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-16

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-17Event Data Recorders ...................................7-18OnStar® ......................................................7-19Navigation System ........................................7-19Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-19

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Buick. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle willbe resolved by your GM dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service, or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership or thegeneral manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, in theU.S., contact the Buick Customer Assistance Center bycalling 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer Communication Centre bycalling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854(French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number. This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel.

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Buick, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. Thatis why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

7-2

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motorsand your dealer are committed to making sure youare completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,in the United States, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you should file with the BBB AutoLine Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

7-3

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event thatyou do not feel your concerns have been addressed afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps one and two,General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitrationprogram. General Motors of Canada Limited hascommitted to binding arbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicle service claims. Theprogram provides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,should be completed in approximately 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), calltoll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively you may call theGeneral Motors Customer Communication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), oryou may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at thefollowing address. Your inquiry should be accompaniedby your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-4

Online Owner Center

(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. Specific vehicle information can be found inone place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected section ofgmcanada.com where you can save information on GMvehicles, get personalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and services youwill have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each of yourpreferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe toE-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canadasection within www.gmcanada.com.

7-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Buick has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate withBuick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesBuick encourages customers to call the toll-free numberfor assistance. However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceBuick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

www.Buick.com1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-252-1112Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

7-6

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

7-7

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-252-1112;(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438) .

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Buick vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Buick Roadside Assistanceprogram.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a persondriving the vehicle without the consent of the owneris not eligible for coverage.

Services ProvidedThe following services are provided in the U.S. andCanada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, upto a maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada, serviceto provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuels will notbe provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be coveredat no charge if you are unable to gain entry intoyour vehicle. A remote unlock may be available ifyou have an active OnStar® subscription. Toensure security, the driver must present personalidentification before lock-out service is provided. InCanada, the vehicle registration is also required.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership for warrantyservice or in the event of a vehicle-disabling crash.Winch-out assistance is provided when the vehicle ismired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in goodcondition, when equipped and properly inflated, iscovered at no charge. The customer is responsiblefor the repair or replacement of the tire if not coveredby a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at nocharge if the vehicle does not start.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,computer personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or the mostscenic route to your destination, anywhere in NorthAmerica, along with helpful travel informationpertaining to your trip.

7-8

Please allow three weeks before your planneddeparture date. Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warranty relatedvehicle disablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from the original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of $500(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day),(B) lodging (maximum of $100/night) and(C) alternate ground transportation (maximum of$40/day). This benefit is to assist you with some ofthe unplanned expense you may incur while waitingfor your vehicle to be repaired.

Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, your advisor willhelp you make any necessary arrangements andexplain how to claim for trip interruption expenseassistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): There may betimes when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you tosecure local emergency road service, and you will bereimbursed up to $100 upon submission of theoriginal receipt to Roadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warrantyrepairs are the responsibility of the driver.

Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited reservethe right to limit services or reimbursement to an owneror driver when, in their sole discretion, the claimsbecome excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.

Calling For AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling, pleaseprovide the following to the Roadside AssistanceRepresentative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephonenumber

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of thevehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

7-9

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehicles operatedon a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impoundtowing caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,Provincial, or Federal law, and mounting, dismountingor changing of snow tires, chains, or other tractiondevices.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors of Canada Limited reservethe right to make any changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program at any time withoutnotification.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, contactyour dealer/retailer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advising yourservice consultant of your transportation needs, yourdealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for the same dayrepair.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we and ourparticipating dealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer support program for vehicleswith the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverageperiod in Canada) and extended powertrain warrantyin both the U.S. and Canada.

Several courtesy transportation options are available toassist in reducing your inconvenience when warrantyrepairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information” furnished witheach new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

7-10

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide youwith shuttle service to get you to your destination withminimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’sshuttle service, the expense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be up to the maximumamount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation

through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costs and be supportedby original receipts. See your dealer for informationregarding the allowance amounts for reimbursementof fuel or other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnightwarranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by original receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usagebeyond the completion of the repair.

It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

7-11

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, may not beavailable at every dealer. Please contact your dealerfor specific information about availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will be administeredby appropriate dealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairsdiminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made withthe same materials and construction methods asthe parts with which your vehicle was originally built.Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain your GM New VehicleWarranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain yourvehicle’s originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts is notknown. Such parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failuresare not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These aremade by companies other than GM and may not havebeen tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure relatedto such parts are not covered by that warranty.

7-12

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies provide reduced protection toyour GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend thatyou assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM originalequipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your current insurance carrier,consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Readyour lease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure you areall right. If you are uninjured, make sure that noone else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger or youare instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.This will help guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-8 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or write down the driver’sname, the service’s name, and the phone number.

7-13

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep theseitems in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance companyand policy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you throughthe information they will need. If they ask fora police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee.In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for yourvehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or aprivate collision repair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortablewith their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that any required replacementcollision parts be original equipment parts, either newGenuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by yourGM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value the repairusing aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligatedto have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, evenif your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

7-14

If another party’s insurance company is paying for therepairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’s collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits withthat company. In such cases, you can have control ofthe repair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

7-15

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins’ give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are availablefor current and past model GM vehicles. To requestan order form, specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

7-16

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example, yourvehicle uses computer modules to monitor and controlengine and transmission performance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in acrash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking tohelp the driver control the vehicle. These modules maystore data to help your dealer/retailer technician serviceyour vehicle. Some modules may also store data abouthow you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. These modules may alsoretain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radiopre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

7-17

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record data relatedto vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDRin this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safetybelts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recordedby the EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crashlocation) is recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying data routinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipmentis required, and access to the vehicle or the EDRis needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,other parties, such as law enforcement, that havethe special equipment, can read the information ifthey have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or, as required by law.Data that GM collects or receives may also be used forGM research needs or may be made available to othersfor research purposes, where a need is shown and thedata is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

7-18

OnStar ®

If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to theOnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on data collection and use.See also OnStar® System on page 2-43 in this manualfor more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or link with any otherGM system containing personal information.

7-19

✍ NOTES

7-20

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-67Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-108Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-23Air Conditioning ...................................... 3-20, 3-24Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-34Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33

Airbag System ................................................ 1-54What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-60When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-59Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-57

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ................................................... 1-67How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-60Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-62Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-66What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-60

Antenna, Backglass ....................................... 3-104Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System ..................................................... 3-105Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-38

Appearance CareAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-104Care of Safety Belts ................................... 5-102Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-106Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-103Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-100Finish Care ............................................... 5-103Finish Damage .......................................... 5-105Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 5-101Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-99Leather .................................................... 5-101Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-105Tires ........................................................ 5-105Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-106Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-106Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-102Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-104

Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10Ashtray ......................................................... 3-20Audio System ................................................. 3-84

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-102Backglass Antenna ..................................... 3-104Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-105Radio Reception ........................................ 3-103Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-85Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-101XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-105

1

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-86Automatic Door Lock ....................................... 2-12Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-25Operation ................................................... 2-29

BBackglass Antenna ........................................ 3-104Battery .......................................................... 5-49

Electric Power Management .......................... 3-18Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-15Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-19

BrakeEmergencies ................................................ 4-5

Brakes .......................................................... 5-46System Warning Light .................................. 3-37

Braking ........................................................... 4-3Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-24Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-58

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-58Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-56License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-61Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-61Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps,

and Back-Up Lamps ................................. 5-59Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-78

CCalibration ..................................................... 3-56California Fuel .................................................. 5-6California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCapacities and Specifications .......................... 5-116Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-14, 2-37, 4-17, 4-28Care of

Safety Belts .............................................. 5-102CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-97Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-53Center Seat ..................................................... 1-7Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-84Charging System Light .................................... 3-36Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-42Check Gas Cap Light ...................................... 3-49Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-106Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-41Older Children ............................................. 1-29Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 1-47

2

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position ................................... 1-50Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ........................................... 1-50Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-39

Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-105Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-20Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-104Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-103Fabric/Carpet ............................................ 5-100Finish Care ............................................... 5-103Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 5-101Interior ....................................................... 5-99Leather .................................................... 5-101Tires ........................................................ 5-105Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-106Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-102Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-102Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................... 5-104

Climate Control System ................................... 3-20Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-29Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-24Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-28

Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-85Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-12Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-98

Compass ....................................................... 3-56Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-20Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3Convenience Net ............................................ 2-54Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-40Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-40Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-27Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-41

Cooling System .............................................. 5-33Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-16Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-46Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-52Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-6Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-16Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ............................................ 7-15Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................... 7-15Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-8Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-16

3

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ....................................... 3-14Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-17Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-17Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-12DIC Compass ................................................. 3-56Diesel

Running Out of Fuel .................................... 2-37Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-97Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Door

Ajar Light ................................................... 3-47Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-12Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12Locks ........................................................ 2-11Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-50DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-76DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-13Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-15Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-21Winter ........................................................ 4-17

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-24

EEDR ............................................................. 7-17Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-108Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-109Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 5-109Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-110Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-109Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-112Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-109

4

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-23Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-45Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-42Coolant ...................................................... 5-27Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-27Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-40Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-40Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-14Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12Exhaust ..................................................... 2-37Oil ............................................................. 5-18Oil Life System ........................................... 5-21Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-32Overheating ................................................ 5-30Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-46Starting ...................................................... 2-26

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-7Warning Light ............................................. 3-39

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-16Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-18Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-29Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-13Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-15

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-23Finish Damage ............................................. 5-105Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-8Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-86Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-87Flat Tire, Storing ..................................... 5-95, 5-97Fluid ............................................................. 5-25

Power Steering ........................................... 5-43Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-44

Fog LampFog ........................................................... 3-15

Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-8Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-7California Fuel .............................................. 5-6Check Gas Cap Light ................................... 3-49Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7Gage ......................................................... 3-48Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-48Running Out of ........................................... 2-37

5

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-109Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-110Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-112Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-109

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-40Fuel .......................................................... 3-48Speedometer .............................................. 3-32Tachometer ................................................. 3-32

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-47Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-6

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-52GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6Headlamp

Aiming ....................................................... 5-56Headlamp Wiring ........................................... 5-109

HeadlampsBulb Replacement ....................................... 5-58Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 3-14Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-58High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8Suggested Light .......................................... 3-47

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3Heater ........................................................... 3-20Heater ........................................................... 3-24Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-46Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-6How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-24Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-70Instrument Panel

Overview ..................................................... 3-4

6

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness .................................................. 3-16Cluster ....................................................... 3-31

Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-16

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-50

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4Keys ............................................................... 2-3

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-64Lamps

Courtesy .................................................... 3-16Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-15Overhead Console Reading .......................... 3-18Rear Assist Handle Reading .......................... 3-18

Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-28Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-22LATCH System

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-41License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-61

LightAirbag Readiness ........................................ 3-33Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-38Brake System Warning ................................. 3-37Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-45Charging System ......................................... 3-36Check Gas Cap .......................................... 3-49Cruise Control ............................................. 3-46Door Ajar ................................................... 3-47Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-40Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light .......................................... 3-39Headlamps Suggested ................................. 3-47Highbeam On ............................................. 3-46Low Coolant Warning ................................... 3-41Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-48Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-47Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-42Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-45Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-34Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-46Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-32Security ..................................................... 3-45Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-48TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-38Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-41Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-38Trunk Ajar .................................................. 3-47

7

LightingDelayed Entry ............................................. 3-17Delayed Exit ............................................... 3-17Entry ......................................................... 3-16Perimeter ................................................... 3-17Theater Dimming ......................................... 3-17

LightsExterior Lamps ............................................ 3-13Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-8High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8Interior Lamps ............................................. 3-16

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-21Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13Locks

Automatic Door Lock .................................... 2-12Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-12Door .......................................................... 2-11Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13Power Door ................................................ 2-11Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............ 2-12Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-41Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-48Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-47Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................. 1-3

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-13Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-42Manual, Using .................................................... iiiMessage

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-39Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-39Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-38Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-38Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-40Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-40Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-40

8

MP3 ............................................................. 3-97MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-19New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-24

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-32Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11Oil

Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-45Engine ....................................................... 5-18Pressure Light ............................................. 3-45

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-21Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-29Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-19OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-43Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-48Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-28Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-19

OutsideConvex Mirror ............................................. 2-40Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-40Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-40

Overhead Console Reading Lamps .................... 3-18Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode .......................................... 5-32Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

PPaint, Damage .............................................. 5-105Park Aid ........................................................ 2-41Park Brake .................................................... 2-32Park (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35

ParkingAssist ........................................................ 2-41Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-36

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-34Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-29Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-62Passing ......................................................... 4-11PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-22PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-22Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4

9

Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-17Power

Door Locks ................................................. 2-11Electrical System ....................................... 5-109Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-46Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-25Seat ............................................................ 1-2Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-43Windows .................................................... 2-18

Pressure Cap ................................................. 5-30Privacy .......................................................... 7-17

Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-18Navigation System ....................................... 7-19OnStar ....................................................... 7-19Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-19

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ............... 2-12

RRadiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-29Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-19Radios .......................................................... 3-84Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-86Radios

Reception ................................................. 3-103Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-85Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-101

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ................... 3-18

Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-39Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® .............................................. 2-39Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-38Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-38Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-27Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-46Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ..................................................... 2-5Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-8Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-89Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-88Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-61Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-13Replacement, Windshield ................................. 5-62Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-15General Motors ........................................... 7-16United States Government ............................ 7-15

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-68Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash .................................................. 1-69Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-25

10

RoadsideAssistance Program ....................................... 7-8

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-21Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-14Running Out of Fuel ........................................ 2-37

SSafety Belt

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32Safety Belts

Care of .................................................... 5-102How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-28Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-22Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-29Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-27Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4Seats

Center Seat .................................................. 1-7Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3Power Seats ................................................. 1-2Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-8

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ............................ 1-50Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-47Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-50

Security Light ................................................. 3-45Service ........................................................... 5-3

Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5California Pershlorate Materials

Requirements ............................................ 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-42Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-16Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-48

Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-66Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-105Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-33Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-35Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8Spare Tire

Compact .................................................... 5-98Installing .................................................... 5-89Removing ................................................... 5-88Storing ............................................... 5-95, 5-97

Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-116Speedometer .................................................. 3-32Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-8

11

StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-8Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-8Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-26Steering .......................................................... 4-9Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-102Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-53Convenience Net ......................................... 2-54Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-52Glove Box .................................................. 2-52

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-20Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-19Sunroof ......................................................... 2-54

TTachometer .................................................... 3-32Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps ....................................... 5-59

TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-38Theater Dimming ............................................ 3-17Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-101Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-20

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-20PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-22PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-22

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Time, Setting .................................................. 3-85Tire

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-41Tires ............................................................. 5-63

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 5-104

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-78Chains ....................................................... 5-84Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-87Cleaning ................................................... 5-105Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-98Different Size .............................................. 5-80If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-86Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-70Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-75Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-89Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-73Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-71Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-89Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-88Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .... 5-95, 5-97Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-64Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-67Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-80Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-82Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-77

12

TowingRecreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-27Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-28Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-27

TractionControl System (TCS) .................................... 4-6Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-38Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-7Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light .......................................... 3-39StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-8

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-25

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-29Trunk ............................................................ 2-14Trunk Ajar Light .............................................. 3-47Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 2-41Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-80

Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-47Operation ................................................... 2-48

Using this Manual ............................................... iii

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-3Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-21Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-48Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-17Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-107Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-108

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC ........................................................... 3-76

Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-8Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-28Visors ........................................................... 2-19

13

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-30Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-58Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-47Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-82Different Size .............................................. 5-80Replacement ............................................... 5-82

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-39Windows ....................................................... 2-17

Power ........................................................ 2-18

WindshieldReplacement ............................................... 5-62Washer ........................................................ 3-9Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-44Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-62Wiper Blades, Cleaning .............................. 5-104Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-109Wipers ......................................................... 3-9

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17

XXM Radio Messages ..................................... 3-100XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-105

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

14

Date post:	26-May-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	1 times
Download:	0 times

2008 Buick LaCrosse Owner Manual M · this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them. For...

Documents